Sei sulla pagina 1di 359

JD7105A

Base Station Analyzer

User’s Manual
www.jdsu.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Table of Contents ..................................................................................................................................... 1


List of Figures .......................................................................................................................................... 8
List of Tables .......................................................................................................................................... 10
1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 1-3
JD7105A ................................................................................................................................ 1-3
JD7105A Highlights ....................................................................................................................... 1-4
Advantage .............................................................................................................................. 1-4
Functions ................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Applicable Systems ................................................................................................................ 1-4
Safety Information ......................................................................................................................... 1-5
Safety Symbol ........................................................................................................................ 1-5
Safety Consideration .............................................................................................................. 1-5
Input Power ............................................................................................................................ 1-6
Electrostatic Discharge Precautions (ESD) ........................................................................... 1-7
2.0 GETTING STARTED ............................................................................................................................ 2-1
Unpacking the JD7105A................................................................................................................ 2-2
JD7105A Standard Accessories .................................................................................................... 2-3
Layout & Hard/Soft Keys ............................................................................................................... 2-4
Front View ..................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Power Switch ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Soft Keys ................................................................................................................................ 2-6
ESC ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Save ....................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Load ....................................................................................................................................... 2-7
System ................................................................................................................................... 2-7
Data Entry Key ....................................................................................................................... 2-9
Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 2-9
Amplitude ............................................................................................................................. 2-10
Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 2-12
BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 2-13
Marker .................................................................................................................................. 2-13
Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 2-14
Measure ............................................................................................................................... 2-15
Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 2-17
Top View ...................................................................................................................................... 2-18
RF In .................................................................................................................................... 2-19
DC 15V ~ 19V In .................................................................................................................. 2-19
RF Out .................................................................................................................................. 2-19
External In ............................................................................................................................ 2-19
SYS I/O ................................................................................................................................ 2-19
E1/T1 .................................................................................................................................... 2-20
Grip....................................................................................................................................... 2-20
3.0 SPECTRUM ANALYZER ...................................................................................................................... 3-1
Spectrum Analyzer Introduction .................................................................................................... 3-2
Spectrum Analysis .................................................................................................................. 3-3
Measurements Types ............................................................................................................. 3-4
What is Spectrum ................................................................................................................... 3-5
RBW ....................................................................................................................................... 3-6
VBW ....................................................................................................................................... 3-6
RF Attenuation ....................................................................................................................... 3-7
Using Spectrum Analyzer .............................................................................................................. 3-8
How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 3-9
Soft Keys ................................................................................................................................ 3-9
ESC ........................................................................................................................................ 3-9
Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 3-9
Amplitude ............................................................................................................................. 3-10
Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 3-12
BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 3-13
2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Marker .................................................................................................................................. 3-14


Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 3-15
Measure ............................................................................................................................... 3-15
Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 3-16
Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-18
Cable Connection ........................................................................................................................ 3-19
Spectrum Analyzer Input Mode ................................................................................................... 3-20
Select Channel Standard............................................................................................................. 3-21
Select Channel Standard ..................................................................................................... 3-22
Spectrum Measurement .............................................................................................................. 3-23
Attenuation, Average, Trace/Display .................................................................................... 3-24
Spectrum Measurement Screen .......................................................................................... 3-25
Channel Power Measurement ..................................................................................................... 3-26
Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-26
Channel Power Measurement Screen ................................................................................. 3-27
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ............................................................................................ 3-28
Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-28
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen......................................................................... 3-29
SEM Measurement...................................................................................................................... 3-30
Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-30
SEM Measurement Screen .................................................................................................. 3-31
ACP Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 3-32
Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-32
ACP Measurement Screen .................................................................................................. 3-33
AM/FM Measurement .................................................................................................................. 3-34
Measurement Procedure ..................................................................................................... 3-34
4.0 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER................................................................................................................. 4-1
Interference Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................................ 4-2
Spectrogram ........................................................................................................................... 4-3
Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) ............................................................................ 4-3
How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 4-4
Soft Keys ................................................................................................................................ 4-4
ESC ........................................................................................................................................ 4-4
Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 4-4
Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 4-5
Trace/Display ......................................................................................................................... 4-7
BW/AVG ................................................................................................................................. 4-7
Marker .................................................................................................................................... 4-8
Peak Search ........................................................................................................................... 4-9
Measure ................................................................................................................................. 4-9
Measure Setup ....................................................................................................................... 4-9
Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 4-10
Cable Connection ........................................................................................................................ 4-12
Making Measurements ................................................................................................................ 4-13
Spectrogram ......................................................................................................................... 4-14
RSSI ..................................................................................................................................... 4-15
5.0 CHANNEL SCANNER .......................................................................................................................... 5-1
Channel Scanner Introduction ....................................................................................................... 5-2
How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 5-3
Soft Keys ................................................................................................................................ 5-3
ESC ........................................................................................................................................ 5-3
Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
Trace/Display ......................................................................................................................... 5-4
BW/AVG ................................................................................................................................. 5-4
Marker .................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Peak Search ........................................................................................................................... 5-5
Measure ................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Measure setup ....................................................................................................................... 5-5
Display Overview (General Channel Scanner ) ..................................................................... 5-6
Display Overview (GSM Channel Scanner) ........................................................................... 5-7
Cable Connection .......................................................................................................................... 5-8
Making Measurements .................................................................................................................. 5-9
General Channel Scanner ................................................................................................... 5-10
GSM Channel scanner ......................................................................................................... 5-10
6.0 CDMA TX ANALYZER........................................................................................................................ 6-1
CDMA Analyzer Introduction ......................................................................................................... 6-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS 3

Concept of Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................. 6-3


Modulation Accuracy (Rho) Measurement Concepts ............................................................ 6-3
Code Domain Measurement Concepts .................................................................................. 6-4
Spurious Emission Measurement Concepts .......................................................................... 6-5
ACPR Measurement Concepts .............................................................................................. 6-5
Using CDMA Analyzer ................................................................................................................... 6-6
How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 6-7
Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 6-7
Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 6-7
Trace/Display ......................................................................................................................... 6-9
BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 6-11
Marker .................................................................................................................................. 6-12
Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 6-13
Measure ............................................................................................................................... 6-13
Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 6-14
Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 6-15
Setup .................................................................................................................................... 6-16
Frequency Setup .......................................................................................................... 6-16
External Clock Setting .................................................................................................. 6-17
Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................. 6-18
Channel Power Procedure ............................................................................................ 6-19
Channel Power Screen ................................................................................................. 6-19
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ..................................................................................... 6-20
Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................... 6-20
Occupied Bandwidth Screen ........................................................................................ 6-21
ACPR Measurement ............................................................................................................ 6-22
ACPR Procedure .......................................................................................................... 6-23
ACPR Screen................................................................................................................ 6-24
Spurious Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement ................................................................... 6-25
SEM Procedure............................................................................................................. 6-25
SEM Screen .................................................................................................................. 6-26
CDMA Code Domain Measurement..................................................................................... 6-27
CDP Measurement Procedure ...................................................................................... 6-27
CDP Screen .................................................................................................................. 6-28
cdma2000 CDP Measurement Items............................................................................ 6-29
CDMA OTA Measurement .................................................................................................... 6-30
OTA Measurement Procedure ...................................................................................... 6-30
OTA Measurement Screen ........................................................................................... 6-31
7.0 EVDO TX ANALYZER ........................................................................................................................ 7-1
EVDO Analyzer Introduction ......................................................................................................... 7-2
1xEV-DO Forward Link .......................................................................................................... 7-3
Frame Structure ..................................................................................................................... 7-3
Channel Power Measurement Concepts ............................................................................... 7-4
Code Domain (Forward Link) Measurement Concepts ......................................................... 7-4
Modulation Accuracy (Waveform Quality) Measurement Concepts ...................................... 7-5
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Concepts ....................................................................... 7-6
Spurious Emissions and Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Concepts......................... 7-6
Using EVDO Analyzer ................................................................................................................... 7-8
How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 7-9
Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 7-9
Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 7-9
Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 7-11
BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 7-13
Marker .................................................................................................................................. 7-14
Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 7-15
Measure ............................................................................................................................... 7-16
Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 7-16
Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 7-17
Setup .................................................................................................................................... 7-18
Frequency Setup .......................................................................................................... 7-18
External Clock Setting .................................................................................................. 7-19
Ext Ref Clock Interface Specification ............................................................................ 7-20
Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................. 7-20
Channel Power Procedure ............................................................................................ 7-21
Channel Power Screen ................................................................................................. 7-21
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ..................................................................................... 7-22
4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................... 7-22


Occupied Bandwidth Screen ........................................................................................ 7-23
Spurious Emission Mask Measurement ............................................................................... 7-24
SEM Procedure............................................................................................................. 7-24
SEM Screen .................................................................................................................. 7-24
ACPR Measurement ............................................................................................................ 7-25
ACPR Procedure .......................................................................................................... 7-25
ACPR Screen................................................................................................................ 7-25
Code Domain Power ............................................................................................................ 7-26
EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement ............................................................................. 7-26
EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement ............................................................................ 7-26
EV-DO Traffic Channel Measurement .......................................................................... 7-26
CDP Procedure ............................................................................................................. 7-27
EV-DO Pilot Channel CDP ............................................................................................ 7-28
EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement Parameters ......................................................... 7-29
EV-DO MAC Channel CDP ........................................................................................... 7-29
EV-DO MAC Channel CDP Screen .............................................................................. 7-30
EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement Parameters ........................................................ 7-30
Required Specification for EV-DO MAC Channel ......................................................... 7-31
EV-DO Data Channel Measurement............................................................................. 7-31
EV-DO Data Channel Measurement Screen ................................................................ 7-32
EV-DO Traffic CDP Measurement Parameters ............................................................ 7-32
Required Specification for EV-DO Traffic Channel ....................................................... 7-33
8.0 WCDMA TX ANALYZER .................................................................................................................... 8-1
WCDMA Analyzer Introduction ...................................................................................................... 8-2
What is WCDMA .................................................................................................................... 8-3
Channel Power Measurement Concept ................................................................................. 8-4
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Concept......................................................................... 8-4
Spurious Emission Mask Measurement Concept .................................................................. 8-5
ACLR Measurement Concept ................................................................................................ 8-5
Code Domain Measurement Concept.................................................................................... 8-6
Modulation Accuracy (Rho) Measurement Concept .............................................................. 8-6
Using WCDMA Analyzer................................................................................................................ 8-7
How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 8-8
Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 8-8
Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 8-8
Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 8-10
BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 8-12
Marker .................................................................................................................................. 8-13
Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 8-14
Measure ............................................................................................................................... 8-15
Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 8-15
Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 8-16
Setup .................................................................................................................................... 8-17
Frequency Setup .......................................................................................................... 8-17
External Clock Setting .................................................................................................. 8-18
Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................. 8-20
Channel Power Procedure ............................................................................................ 8-20
Channel Power Screen ................................................................................................. 8-21
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ..................................................................................... 8-21
Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................... 8-22
Occupied Bandwidth Screen ........................................................................................ 8-22
Spurious Emission Measurement ........................................................................................ 8-23
SEM Procedure............................................................................................................. 8-23
SEM Screen .................................................................................................................. 8-24
ACLR Measurement............................................................................................................. 8-24
ACLR Procedure ........................................................................................................... 8-25
ACLR Screen ................................................................................................................ 8-25
Code Domain Analysis (Demodulator) ................................................................................. 8-26
CDP Procedure ............................................................................................................. 8-26
CDP Screen .................................................................................................................. 8-27
WCDMA OTA Measurement ................................................................................................ 8-28
OTA Measurement Procedure ...................................................................................... 8-28
OTA Measurement Screen ........................................................................................... 8-29
9.0 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER ............................................................................................................... 9-1
GSM/EDGE Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................................ 9-2
TABLE OF CONTENTS 5

What is GSM .......................................................................................................................... 9-3


Time Slot ................................................................................................................................ 9-4
Channel Power Measurement Concept ................................................................................. 9-4
Spurious Emission Measurement Concept ............................................................................ 9-4
Code Domain Measurement Concept (Demodulator) ........................................................... 9-5
Phase & Frequency Error Measurement Concept ................................................................. 9-5
Baseband I/Q Measurement Concept.................................................................................... 9-6
Using GSM/EDGE Tx Analyzer ..................................................................................................... 9-7
How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................... 9-8
Freq/Chan .............................................................................................................................. 9-8
Amplitude ............................................................................................................................... 9-8
Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 9-10
BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 9-11
Marker .................................................................................................................................. 9-12
Peak Search ......................................................................................................................... 9-13
Measure ............................................................................................................................... 9-13
Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................... 9-14
Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 9-15
Setup .................................................................................................................................... 9-16
Frequency Setup .......................................................................................................... 9-16
External Clock Setting .................................................................................................. 9-17
Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................. 9-19
Channel Power Procedure ............................................................................................ 9-19
Channel Power Screen ................................................................................................. 9-20
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ..................................................................................... 9-21
Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................... 9-21
Occupied Bandwidth Screen ........................................................................................ 9-22
Spurious Emissions Measurement....................................................................................... 9-23
SEM Procedure............................................................................................................. 9-23
SEM Screen .................................................................................................................. 9-23
Power vs. Time Measurement ............................................................................................. 9-24
PvT Procedure .............................................................................................................. 9-24
PvT Screens ................................................................................................................. 9-25
I/Q Polar Vector Measurement ............................................................................................. 9-26
I/Q Polar Vector Procedure ........................................................................................... 9-26
I/Q Polar Vector Screen ................................................................................................ 9-27
I/Q Demodulated Bits Measurement .................................................................................... 9-28
I/Q Demodulated Bits Procedure .................................................................................. 9-28
I/Q Demodulated Bits Screen ....................................................................................... 9-29
GSM OTA Measurement ...................................................................................................... 9-30
OTA Measurement Procedure ...................................................................................... 9-30
OTA Measurement Screen ........................................................................................... 9-31
10.0 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER ........................................................................................................... 10-1
TD-SCDMA Analyzer Introduction ............................................................................................... 10-2
Frame Structure ................................................................................................................... 10-3
Time Slot .............................................................................................................................. 10-4
DwPTS ................................................................................................................................. 10-5
UpPTS .................................................................................................................................. 10-5
GP ........................................................................................................................................ 10-5
FDD vs. TDD ........................................................................................................................ 10-5
Using TD-SCDMA Tx Analyzer.................................................................................................... 10-6
How to Use Keys ......................................................................................................................... 10-7
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................ 10-7
Amplitude ............................................................................................................................. 10-7
Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 10-9
BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................. 10-10
Marker ................................................................................................................................ 10-10
Peak Search ....................................................................................................................... 10-12
Measure ............................................................................................................................. 10-12
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................... 10-13
Display Overview ............................................................................................................... 10-16
Setup .................................................................................................................................. 10-17
Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................ 10-17
External Clock Setting ................................................................................................ 10-18
Channel Power Measurement ........................................................................................... 10-19
Channel Power Procedure .......................................................................................... 10-19
6 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................... 10-20


Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ................................................................................... 10-21
Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................. 10-21
Occupied Bandwidth Screen ...................................................................................... 10-22
Spectrum Emissions Measurement ................................................................................... 10-23
SEM Procedure........................................................................................................... 10-23
SEM Screen ................................................................................................................ 10-23
ACLR Measurement........................................................................................................... 10-24
ACLR Procedure ......................................................................................................... 10-24
ACLR Screen .............................................................................................................. 10-24
Power vs. Time Measurement ........................................................................................... 10-25
P vs T Procedure ........................................................................................................ 10-25
P vs T Screens ............................................................................................................ 10-26
Code Domain Power (Demodulator) .................................................................................. 10-28
CDP Procedure ........................................................................................................... 10-28
Code Power Screens .................................................................................................. 10-29
11.0 CABLE & ANTENNA ANALYZER ...................................................................................................... 11-1
Cable and Antenna Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................... 11-2
Standing Wave Ratio ............................................................................................................ 11-3
Practical implications of SWR .............................................................................................. 11-3
Return loss ........................................................................................................................... 11-4
DTF ...................................................................................................................................... 11-5
Cable Loss ........................................................................................................................... 11-5
Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer............................................................................................. 11-6
How to Use Keys ......................................................................................................................... 11-7
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................ 11-7
Amplitude ............................................................................................................................. 11-7
Trace/Display ....................................................................................................................... 11-8
BW/AVG ............................................................................................................................... 11-9
Marker .................................................................................................................................. 11-9
Peak Search ....................................................................................................................... 11-10
Measure ............................................................................................................................. 11-10
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................... 11-10
VSWR ......................................................................................................................................... 11-11
VSWR Display..................................................................................................................... 11-11
Setting Frequency .............................................................................................................. 11-13
Setting Trace Point ............................................................................................................. 11-19
Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 11-19
Using Markers .................................................................................................................... 11-19
Using Limit Line.................................................................................................................. 11-20
DTF Display ....................................................................................................................... 11-21
DTF............................................................................................................................................ 11-21
DTF Display ....................................................................................................................... 11-21
DTF Setup .......................................................................................................................... 11-23
Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 11-28
Using Markers .................................................................................................................... 11-28
Using Limit Line.................................................................................................................. 11-30
Cable Loss (One Port Measurement) ....................................................................................... 11-31
Cable Loss Display ............................................................................................................ 11-31
Setting Frequency .............................................................................................................. 11-33
Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 11-37
Using Markers .................................................................................................................... 11-37
Using Limit Line.................................................................................................................. 11-37
Gain/Loss (Two Ports Measurement) ........................................................................................ 11-39
Gain/Loss Display .............................................................................................................. 11-39
Setting Frequency .............................................................................................................. 11-41
Scale Adjustment ............................................................................................................... 11-46
Using Markers .................................................................................................................... 11-46
Using Limit Line.................................................................................................................. 11-47
12.0 POWER METER ............................................................................................................................. 12-1
Power Meter Introduction ............................................................................................................ 12-2
Using RF Power Meter ................................................................................................................ 12-3
How to Use Keys ......................................................................................................................... 12-4
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................ 12-4
Display Overview ................................................................................................................. 12-5
Cable Connection................................................................................................................. 12-6
TABLE OF CONTENTS 7

Connecting Sensor............................................................................................................... 12-7


Measurement Procedure (internal) ...................................................................................... 12-9
Making Power Measurement ...................................................................................................... 12-9
Measurement Procedure (using external power sensors) ................................................. 12-10
Measurement Results ........................................................................................................ 12-11
13.0 E1 ANALYZER ............................................................................................................................... 13-1
E1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 13-2
E1 Standard ......................................................................................................................... 13-3
G.703/G.704 Framing ........................................................................................................... 13-3
E1 Frame Structure .............................................................................................................. 13-4
E1 vs. T1 .............................................................................................................................. 13-4
E1 Pulse ............................................................................................................................... 13-5
E1 Physicals ......................................................................................................................... 13-6
Framing ................................................................................................................................ 13-7
Line Code ............................................................................................................................. 13-7
CRC-4 Error Detection ......................................................................................................... 13-8
Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 13-9
Using E1 Analyzer ..................................................................................................................... 13-11
How to Use Keys ....................................................................................................................... 13-12
Measure ............................................................................................................................. 13-12
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................... 13-12
Display Overview ............................................................................................................... 13-14
Measurement Setup .................................................................................................................. 13-15
Connection Diagram .......................................................................................................... 13-16
Terminate Mode ................................................................................................................. 13-17
Bridge Mode ....................................................................................................................... 13-17
Monitor Mode ..................................................................................................................... 13-17
Loop Test ............................................................................................................................ 13-17
14.0 T1 ANALYZER ............................................................................................................................... 14-1
T1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................ 14-2
T1 Bandwidth ....................................................................................................................... 14-3
T1 Framing ........................................................................................................................... 14-3
Line Code ............................................................................................................................. 14-4
Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 14-6
Physical Interface ................................................................................................................. 14-8
Using T1 Analyzer ....................................................................................................................... 14-9
How to Use Keys ....................................................................................................................... 14-10
Measure ............................................................................................................................. 14-10
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................... 14-10
Display Overview ............................................................................................................... 14-13
Measurement Setup .................................................................................................................. 14-14
Connection Diagram.................................................................................................................. 14-15
Terminate Mode......................................................................................................................... 14-16
Bridge Mode .............................................................................................................................. 14-16
Monitor Mode ............................................................................................................................ 14-16
Loop Test ................................................................................................................................... 14-16
15.0 APPENDIX ..................................................................................................................................... 15-1
APPENDIX A. SPECIFICATION ......................................................................................................... 15-2
APPENDIX B. BATTERY SPECIFICATION ........................................................................................... 15-4
APPENDIX C. CABLE LIST .............................................................................................................. 15-5
APPENDIX D. BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD ................................................................. 15-7
APPENDIX E. VSWR-RETURN LOSS CONVERSION TABLE ............................................................... 15-8
ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................................................................................... 15-9
8 LIST OF FIGURES

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1 – Overview of Spectrum Analyzer Display ............................................................. 3-18


Figure 2 – PA Output Port and RF In Port Connection ........................................................ 3-19
Figure 3 – Monitor Port and RF In Port Connection ............................................................ 3-19
Figure 4 – Example of Spectrum Measurement Screen ...................................................... 3-25
Figure 5 – Example of Channel Power Measurement Screen ............................................ 3-27
Figure 6 – Example of Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen .................................... 3-29
Figure 7 – Example of SEM Measurement Screen ............................................................. 3-31
Figure 8 – Example of ACP Measurement Screen .............................................................. 3-33
Figure 9 – Overview of Interference Analyzer Display (Spectrogram) ................................. 4-10
Figure 10 – Overview of Interference Analyzer Display (RSSI) ........................................... 4-11
Figure 11 – Connection for Interference Analyzer ............................................................... 4-12
Figure 12 – Overview of General Channel Scanner Display ................................................. 5-6
Figure 13 – Overview of GSM Channel Scanner Display ...................................................... 5-7
Figure 14 – PA Output Port and RF In Port Connection ........................................................ 5-8
Figure 15 – Monitor Port and RF In Port Connection ............................................................ 5-8
Figure 16 – Overview of CDMA Tx Analyzer Display ........................................................... 6-15
Figure 17 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports .................................................................................. 6-17
Figure 18 – cdma2000 Channel Power Measurement Screen ............................................ 6-19
Figure 19 – cdma2000 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ................................... 6-21
Figure 20 – cdma2000 ACPR Measurement Screen........................................................... 6-24
Figure 21 – cdma2000 Emission Measurement Screen ...................................................... 6-26
Figure 22 – cdma2000 CDP Measurement Screen ............................................................. 6-28
Figure 23 – CDMA OTA Measurement Screen .................................................................... 6-31
Figure 24 – 1xEv-DO Forward Link Structure ........................................................................ 7-3
Figure 25 – Overview of 1xEVDO Tx Analyzer Display ....................................................... 7-17
Figure 26 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports .................................................................................. 7-19
Figure 27 – EVDO Channel Power Measurement Screen .................................................. 7-21
Figure 28 – EVDO Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen .......................................... 7-23
Figure 29 – EVDO Emission Measurement Screen ............................................................ 7-24
Figure 30 – EVDO ACPR Measurement Screen ................................................................. 7-25
Figure 31 – 1xEV-DO Pilot CDP Measurement Result ........................................................ 7-28
Figure 32 – 1xEV-DO MAC CDP Measurement Result ....................................................... 7-30
Figure 33 – 1xEV-DO Data Measurement Result (Idle Slot) ............................................... 7-32
Figure 34 – Overview of WCDMA Tx Analyzer Display ....................................................... 8-16
Figure 35 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports .................................................................................. 8-18
Figure 36 – WCDMA Channel Power Measurement Screen ............................................... 8-21
Figure 37 – WCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ...................................... 8-22
Figure 38 – WCDMA Spurious Emission Measurement Screen .......................................... 8-24
Figure 39 – WCDMA ACLR Measurement Screen .............................................................. 8-25
Figure 40 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Full Screen ................................................... 8-27
Figure 41 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Zoomed Screen ............................................ 8-27
Figure 42 – WCDMA OTA Measurement Screen ................................................................ 8-29
Figure 43 – Overview of GSM Tx Analyzer Display ............................................................. 9-15
Figure 44 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports .................................................................................. 9-17
Figure 45 – GSM/EDGE Channel Power Measurement Screen ......................................... 9-20
Figure 46 – GSM/EDGE Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ................................. 9-22
Figure 47 – GSM/EDGE SEM Measurement Screen .......................................................... 9-23
Figure 48 – GSM/EDGE P vs T (Slot) Measurement Screen .............................................. 9-25
Figure 49 – GSM/EDGE P vs T (Frame) Measurement Screen .......................................... 9-25
Figure 50 – GSM Polar Vector Measurement Screen ......................................................... 9-27
Figure 51 – EDGE Polar Vector Measurement Screen ....................................................... 9-27
Figure 52 – GSM Demodulated Data bits Analysis Screen ................................................. 9-29
Figure 53 – EDGE Demodulated Data bits Analysis Screen ............................................... 9-29
Figure 54 – GSM/EDGE OTA Measurement Screen ........................................................... 9-31
Figure 55 – TD-SCDMA Frame Structure ............................................................................ 10-3
Figure 56 – TD-SCDMA Resource Structure ....................................................................... 10-4
Figure 57 – Overview of GSM Tx Analyzer Display ........................................................... 10-16
Figure 58 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports ................................................................................ 10-18
Figure 59 – TD-SCDMA Channel Power Measurement Screen ........................................ 10-20
Figure 60 – TD-SCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen ............................... 10-22
LIST OF FIGURES 9

Figure 61 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Screen ......................................................... 10-23


Figure 62 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Screen ......................................................... 10-24
Figure 63 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Slot) Measurement Screen ............................................. 10-26
Figure 64 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Frame) Measurement Screen......................................... 10-26
Figure 65 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Mask) Measurement Screen .......................................... 10-27
Figure 66 – TD-SCDMA Code Power Measurement Screen............................................. 10-29
Figure 67 – TD-SCDMA Midamble Power Measurement Screen ..................................... 10-29
Figure 68 – TD-SCDMA Symbol Data Measurement Screen ............................................ 10-30
Figure 69 – TD-SCDMA Code Error Measurement Screen ............................................... 10-30
Figure 70 – TD-SCDMA Constellation Measurement Screen............................................ 10-31
Figure 71 – VSWR Measurement Screen Display.............................................................. 11-11
Figure 72 – Calibration for VSWR measurement .............................................................. 11-15
Figure 73 – Calibration using extension cable ................................................................... 11-16
Figure 74 – Connection for VSWR Measurement ............................................................. 11-18
Figure 75 – Using Markers in VSWR Measurement Mode ................................................ 11-20
Figure 76 – Limit Line Application ...................................................................................... 11-20
Figure 77 – DTF Measurement Screen Display ................................................................ 11-21
Figure 78 – Calibration for DTF measurement .................................................................. 11-25
Figure 79 – Connection Diagram for DTF Measurement................................................... 11-27
Figure 80 – Using Markers in DTF Measurement Mode.................................................... 11-28
Figure 81 – DTF Measurement in VSWR scale ................................................................. 11-29
Figure 82 – DTF Measurement in Return Loss scale ........................................................ 11-29
Figure 83 – Using Limit Line in DTF Measurement ........................................................... 11-30
Figure 84 – Cable Loss Measurement Screen Display ..................................................... 11-31
Figure 85 – Port Calibration for One Port Cable Loss Measurement ................................ 11-34
Figure 86 – One Port Cable Loss Measurement Connection Diagram ............................. 11-36
Figure 87 – Using Markers in Cable Loss Measurement Mode ........................................ 11-37
Figure 88 – Using Limit Line in Cable Loss Measurement Mode ...................................... 11-38
Figure 89 – Gain/Loss Measurement Screen Display ....................................................... 11-39
Figure 90 – Two Ports Calibration for Gain/Loss Measurement ........................................ 11-42
Figure 91 – Two Ports Gain/Loss Measurement Diagram ................................................. 11-44
Figure 92 – Two Ports Gain Measurement w/+30dB Attenuator ....................................... 11-45
Figure 93 – Using Markers in Cable Loss Measurement Mode ........................................ 11-46
Figure 94 – Using Limit Line in Cable Loss Measurement Mode ...................................... 11-47
Figure 95 – Power Meter Screen ......................................................................................... 12-5
Figure 96 – Connection Diagram (Direct Connection) ......................................................... 12-6
Figure 97 – Connection Diagram (Indirect Connection) ...................................................... 12-6
Figure 98 – Power Sensor Connection (Terminating Type) ................................................. 12-7
Figure 99 – Power Sensor Connection (Directional Type) ................................................... 12-8
Figure 100 – RF Power Meter Measurement Results (Abs) .............................................. 12-11
Figure 101 – RF Power Meter Measurement Results (Rel) ............................................... 12-12
Figure 102 – E1 Frame Structure......................................................................................... 13-4
Figure 103 – Mask of the Pulse at 2.048 Mbps Interface .................................................... 13-5
Figure 104 – AMI & HDB3 Line Coding ............................................................................... 13-8
Figure 105 – E1 Analyzer Screen ...................................................................................... 13-14
Figure 106 – Typical Connection Diagram for T1 Analysis ................................................ 13-16
Figure 107 – T1 Bandwidth .................................................................................................. 14-3
Figure 108 – D4 Frame Format ........................................................................................... 14-4
Figure 109 – AMI Encoding .................................................................................................. 14-5
Figure 110 – B8ZS Encoded Signal ..................................................................................... 14-6
Figure 111 – Typical T1 Cabling ........................................................................................... 14-8
Figure 112 – T1 Analyzer Screen ....................................................................................... 14-13
Figure 113 – Typical Connection Diagram for T1 Analysis ................................................ 14-15
10 LIST OF TABLES

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1 – Input Power Requirements ..................................................................................... 1-6


Table 2 – JD7105A Accessory List ......................................................................................... 2-3
Table 3 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 2-10
Table 4 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 3-10
Table 5 – VBW Corresponding to VBW/RBW Ratio ............................................................ 3-13
Table 6 – Select Channel Standard...................................................................................... 3-22
Table 7 – Spectrum Measurement Procedure ..................................................................... 3-23
Table 8 – Attenuation, Average, Trace/Display .................................................................... 3-24
Table 9 – Channel Power Measurement Procedure ............................................................ 3-26
Table 10 – Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure.................................................. 3-28
Table 11 – SEM Measurement Procedure ........................................................................... 3-30
Table 12 – ACP Measurement Procedure............................................................................ 3-32
Table 13 – AM/FM Measurement Procedure ....................................................................... 3-34
Table 11 – Ref Level Setting Procedure................................................................................. 4-5
Table 12 – VBW Corresponding to VBW/RBW Ratio ............................................................ 4-7
Table 16 – Interference Analysis in Spectrogram View ........................................................ 4-14
Table 17 – Interference Analysis in RSSI View .................................................................... 4-15
Table 18 – General Channel Scanner .................................................................................. 5-10
Table 19 – GSM Channel Scanner ...................................................................................... 5-10
Table 20 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 6-8
Table 21 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer ....................................................................... 6-16
Table 22 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................... 6-17
Table 23 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ........................................................................... 6-18
Table 24 – cdma2000 Channel Power Measurement Procedure ........................................ 6-19
Table 25 – cdma2000 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ................................ 6-20
Table 26 – cdma2000 ACPR Measurement Procedure ....................................................... 6-23
Table 27 – cdma2000 Emission Measurement Procedure .................................................. 6-25
Table 28 – cdma2000 CDP Measurement Procedure ......................................................... 6-27
Table 29 – CDMA OTA Measurement Procedure ................................................................ 6-30
Table 30 – Ref Level Setting Procedure .............................................................................. 7-10
Table 32 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer ....................................................................... 7-18
Table 32 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................... 7-19
Table 33 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ........................................................................... 7-20
Table 34 – EVDO Channel Power Measurement Procedure ............................................... 7-21
Table 35 – EVDO Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ...................................... 7-22
Table 36 – EVDO Emission Measurement Procedure ......................................................... 7-24
Table 37 – EVDO ACPR Measurement Procedure.............................................................. 7-25
Table 38 – 1xEV-DO CDP Measurement Procedure ........................................................... 7-27
Table 39 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 8-9
Table 40 – Frequency setup for Tx Analyzer........................................................................ 8-17
Table 41 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................... 8-18
Table 42 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ........................................................................... 8-19
Table 43 – WCDMA Channel Power Measurement Procedure ........................................... 8-20
Table 44 – WCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ................................... 8-22
Table 45 – WCDMA Spurious Emission Measurement Procedure ...................................... 8-23
Table 46 – WCDMA ACLR Measurement Procedure .......................................................... 8-25
Table 47 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Procedure....................................................... 8-26
Table 48 – WCDMA OTA Measurement Procedure ............................................................. 8-28
Table 49 – Ref Level Setting Procedure ................................................................................ 9-9
Table 50 – Frequency setup for Tx Analyzer........................................................................ 9-16
Table 51 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................... 9-17
Table 52 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ........................................................................... 9-18
Table 53 – GSM/EDGE Channel Power Measurement Procedure ..................................... 9-19
Table 54 – GSM/EDGE Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ............................. 9-21
Table 55 – GSM/EDGE SEM Measurement Procedure ...................................................... 9-23
Table 56 – GSM/EDGE P vs T Measurement Procedure .................................................... 9-24
Table 57 – GSM/EDGE I/Q Polar Vector Measurement Procedure ..................................... 9-26
Table 58 – GSM/EDGE I/Q Demodulated Bits Measurement Procedure ............................ 9-28
Table 59 – GSM/EDGE OTA Measurement Procedure ....................................................... 9-30
Table 60 – FDD and TDD component comparison .............................................................. 10-5
LIST OF TABLES 11

Table 61 – Ref Level Setting Procedure .............................................................................. 10-8


Table 62 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer ..................................................................... 10-17
Table 63 – External Clock Operating Standard .................................................................. 10-18
Table 64 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec ......................................................................... 10-19
Table 65 – TD-SCDMA Channel Power Measurement Procedure .................................... 10-19
Table 66 – TD-SCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure ............................ 10-21
Table 67 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Procedure ..................................................... 10-23
Table 68 – TD-SCDMA ACLR Measurement Procedure ................................................... 10-24
Table 69 – TD-SCDMA P vs T Measurement Procedure ................................................... 10-25
Table 70 – TD-SCDMA Demodulator Measurement Procedure ........................................ 10-28
Table 71 – Frequency Setting Procedure........................................................................... 11-13
Table 72 – Calibration Procedure....................................................................................... 11-17
Table 73 – DTF Setup Procedure ...................................................................................... 11-24
Table 74 – Calibration Procedure....................................................................................... 11-26
Table 75 – Frequency Setting Procedure........................................................................... 11-33
Table 76 – Port Calibration Procedure for Cable Loss Measurement ............................... 11-35
Table 77 – Cable Loss Measurement Procedure ............................................................... 11-36
Table 78 – Frequency Setting Procedure........................................................................... 11-41
Table 79 – Normalization Procedure for Gain/Loss Measurement .................................... 11-43
Table 80 – Normalization Procedure for Gain/Loss Measurement .................................... 11-44
Table 81 – Types of Power Sensors .................................................................................... 12-7
Table 82 – Power Measurement Procedure w/ Internal Power Meter ................................. 12-9
Table 83 – RF Power Measurement Using External Power Sensor .................................. 12-10
Table 84 – E1 vs. T1 ............................................................................................................ 13-4
Table 85 – ITU-T G.703 2.048 Mbps Pulse Mask Specifications ......................................... 13-6
Table 86 – E1 Analysis Procedure ..................................................................................... 13-15
Table 87 – B8ZS Encoding .................................................................................................. 14-5
Table 88 – T1 Analysis Procedure ..................................................................................... 14-14
This page intentionally left blank.
1-2 INTRODUCTION

CH
1
1.0 INTRODUCTION

In this chapter
Overview....................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
JD7105A ............................................................................................................................................... 1-3
JD7105A Highlights ...................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Advantage ............................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 1-4
Applicable Systems .............................................................................................................................. 1-4
Safety Information ........................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Safety Symbol ...................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Safety Consideration ............................................................................................................................ 1-5
Input Power .......................................................................................................................................... 1-6
Electrostatic Discharge Precautions (ESD) .......................................................................................... 1-7

Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION 1-3

CH
OVERVIEW
1
JD7105A
JD7105A Mobile Communication Service Providers face the critical need for
reduction of field maintenance and operating cost to deal with ever
increasing competition in the wireless service industry. The JD7105A is the
solution to this need by integrating all the functions to diagnose base
stations in a single field portable test solution. The JD7105A makes
service and maintenance activities on base station easier, simpler and
faster by performing all complicated test and measurement processes
through just a few key strokes.

JD7105A
Base Station
Analyzer

Chapter 1
1-4 INTRODUCTION

CH
JD7105A HIGHLIGHTS
1 ADVANTAGE
ADVANTAGE The JD7105A is an ‘integrated’ measurement solution that can be
operated either by external AC power or by its internal battery for field
applications.

The JD7105A user interface has been specifically designed for service
providers with customized menus and simple calibration procedures
enabling accurate and reliable measurement results.
FUNCTIONS
FUNCTIONS Spectrum Analyzer
Transmission Analyzer
Cable & Antenna Analyzer
RF Power Meter
E1/T1 Analyzer
Interference Analyzer
Channel Scanner
Auto Measurement
APPLICABLE SYSTEMS
APPLICABLE cdmaOne
SYSTEMS cdma2000
1xEV-DO
WCDMA/HSDPA
GSM/GPRS/EDGE
TD-SCDMA

Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION 1-5

CH
SAFETY INFORMATION
1
SAFETY SYMBOL
SAFETY SYMBOL The following symbols must be observed for the proper operation of the
instrument.

Warning WARNING denotes a hazard. It calls for attention to a procedure or


practice which if not performed correctly could result in a personal injury.
Do not proceed beyond a WARNING indication until all the conditions are
fully understood and met.

Caution CAUTION denotes a caution. It calls for attention to a procedure or


practice which, if not performed correctly could result in a partial or totally
! damage of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION indication
until all the conditions are fully understood and met.

Notice NOTICE denotes additional information or direction of operation of the


instrument.

SAFETY CONSIDERATION
SAFETY This product is a Safety Class I product. The main power plug shall
CONSIDERATION only be inserted in a power socket outlet provided with a protective
ground terminal.

Only the supplied AC/DC power adaptor shall be used. JDSU is not
liable for any personal injury or product damage caused by using a
different power supply.

Removal of internal or external protective cover may cause


personal injury or damage to the instrument. JDSU is not liable for
any incident caused by unauthorized removal of such protective parts.

Chapter 1
1-6 INTRODUCTION

CH
INPUT POWER There is no need to select the input voltage within the tolerable input line
1 voltage range (AC 110 ~ 250V). The instrument doesn’t have a separate
line protection fuse.

Item Specification

Adaptor Input Voltage & Frequency 100 ~ 250V AC, 47 ~ 66 Hz

Warm up < 75W


Power Consumption
Operation < 80W

Table 1 – Input Power Requirements

Only the AC/DC power adaptor supplied with the instrument shall
! be used. JDSU is not liable for any damage to the product
caused by using a different power supply.

Always use three prong AC power cord supplied with this


instrument. Failure to ensure adequate grounding by not using
this power cord may cause personal injury/or product damage.

The battery installed in this instrument is Lithium-Ion and it may

! lead to explosion if not connected correctly. In case the battery


needs to be exchanged, it must be of the same type or
compatible. The disposal of batteries must be done following accordingly
to safety and environmental regulations.

Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION 1-7

CH
ELECTROSTATIC This instrument was manufactured in an ESD protected environment.
1
DISCHARGE Semiconductor devices used in this product are susceptible to damage by
PRECAUTIONS static discharge. Depending on the magnitude of the discharge,
(ESD) semiconductor devices may be damaged by direct contact or mere
proximity of a static charge. This may cause performance degradation,
early failure or immediate destruction. Please use the following guidelines
to prevent ESD damage.

 Before connecting the cable to the JD7105A terminal, short circuit the
center of the cable with an outside metal shield.
 Before removing the connected cables or getting in contact with the
center pin, wear a wrist strap with 1 MΩ resistor connected to the
ground.
 All equipment must be connected to the ground to avoid the
accumulation of static charges.

Chapter 1
GETTING STARTED 2-1

2.0 GETTING STARTED CH


2

In this chapter
Unpacking the JD7105A ............................................................................................................................... 2-2
JD7105A Standard Accessories.................................................................................................................... 2-3
Layout & Hard/Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................. 2-4
Front View .................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Power Switch ........................................................................................................................................ 2-6
Mode ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................................. 2-6
ESC ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Save ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-6
Load...................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
System.................................................................................................................................................. 2-7
Data Entry Key...................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 2-9
Amplitude............................................................................................................................................ 2-10
Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 2-12
BW/AVG.............................................................................................................................................. 2-13
Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 2-13
Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 2-14
Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 2-15
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 2-17
Top View ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-18
RF In ................................................................................................................................................... 2-19
DC 15V ~ 19V In................................................................................................................................. 2-19
RF Out ................................................................................................................................................ 2-19
External In .......................................................................................................................................... 2-19
SYS I/O ............................................................................................................................................... 2-19
E1/T1 .................................................................................................................................................. 2-20
Grip ....................................................................................................................................... 2-20

Chapter 2
2-2 GETTING STARTED

UNPACKING THE JD7105A

CH Unpack and inspect the shipping container thoroughly to ensure that


nothing was damaged during shipment.
2

If the contents are damaged or defective, contact your nearest JDSU's


authorized sales and service office. Keep the shipping materials for
carrier’s inspection.

Verify that all the parts were included in the shipping container. The basic
test set package for the JD7105A includes:

 JD7105A, Base Station Analyzer


 Soft-Carrying Case
 1GByte USB Memory
 User’s Manual (CD-ROM)
 Certificate of Calibration
 Stylus Pen
 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (Built-in)
 AC/DC Adaptor (AC 110/220V -> DC19V)
 Power Cable
 LAN Cross-Over Cable (1.5m long, CAT5)

Chapter 2
GETTING STARTED 2-3

JD7105A STANDARD ACCESSORIES

Part No Picture Q’ty Description CH


JD71050341 1 Soft Carrying Case 2

G710450313 1 1GB USB Memory

G710550361 1 User’s Manual (CD-ROM)

G710550365 1 Certificate of Calibration

Sheet

G710550316 1 Stylus Pen

G710550321 1 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack

(Built-in)

G710550322 1 AC/DC Power Adapter with

Power Cable

G710550335 1 LAN Cross Over Cable

(1.5m long, CAT5)

Table 2 – JD7105A Accessory List

NOTE:
Refer to the “Ordering Information” for optional accessories.

Chapter 2
2-4 GETTING STARTED

LAYOUT & HARD/SOFT KEYS


LAYOUT
CH
2

Chapter 2
GETTING STARTED 2-5

FRONT VIEW

CH
2

Chapter 2
2-6 GETTING STARTED

POWER SWITCH It powers the JD7105A on and off; when the JD7105A is on the green LED
is lit. When the external power is connected, through the AC/DC adaptor,

CH the red LED is lit.

MODE The mode key is used to select the major functions of the JD7105A such
as Spectrum Analyzer, TX Analyzer, Antenna/Cable Analyzer, Power Meter,
and E1/T1 Analyzer.

SOFT KEYS Soft keys are used to activate a specific function, invoke other screen keys,
or to input specific value units. Selecting soft keys will highlight its caption
to show its selection. In case the soft keys are in the same menu layer but
cannot be displayed on one screen, a “More” or “▶” key on the bottom
corner will be displayed indicating the existence of additional soft keys.

ESC The ESC key is used to move to the previous menu without changing the
current setup.

SAVE Measurement results can be saved either as graphic files or as data files.
All measurement results can be saved as graphic files. Spectrum
measurement results can also be saved as data files.

SAVE SCREEN: Saves current screen in a JPEG file. The file name can
be assigned by the user. If the file name is not assigned by the user, then
the instrument will automatically assign it based on the measurement
mode and the measurement time.

SAVE TRACE: Saves a captured trace in a data file. The file name
extension is *.tra. The user setup (Input Attenuation, RBW, VBW, offset,
Average, etc.). however not saved.

SAVE STATUS: This function saves the user setup configuration and the
calibration data. Up to 20 setups can be saved.

SAVE TO: Selects where the information will be saved, either into the
internal memory or into the external USB memory.

Chapter 2
GETTING STARTED 2-7

LOAD LOAD SCREEN: This function recalls and displays a saved screen. The
active measurement continues to be measured, but it is not displayed on
the screen. Pressing any key removes the loaded screen and the active
CH
measurement is displayed.
2

LOAD TRACE: This function is used to recall multiple traces for


comparison purposes.

When the instrument is in Cable and Antenna Analyzer mode, the


following changes happen automatically when a saved trace is recalled:

 The frequency or distance setting of the current measurement mode


is changed automatically to fit into the recalled trace. On the upper
right corner of the screen, the frequency setting and the assigned
Trace number (Trace CH) of the recalled trace are displayed.
 The Y scale unit is adjusted automatically to fit into the Y scale of the
recalled trace.
 A second trace can be recalled, but it may not be loaded if its start
and stop points of the X scale are not identical to those of the first
loaded trace.
 The trace with a different Y scale may not be seen on the screen even
if the trace information appears on the trace summary table on the
upper right corner of the display. When multiple traces with different Y
scale are loaded, the corresponding trace with the current Y scale is
only shown on the screen.

SYSTEM The System key enables users to verify the system information or to
change the instrument settings.

FREQ REF: Sets the Frequency References to improve measurement


accuracy. The Frequency reference can be selected as Internal, Ext
10MHz, Ext 13MHz, or Ext 15MHz.

TIME REF: Sets the Timing Reference. Time references can be selected
as Internal, External or GPS.

Chapter 2
2-8 GETTING STARTED

LICENSE MANAGER: The JD7105A License Manager is a menu used to


select optional modules, which are activated by entering the

CH corresponding license number.

2
SELECT LICENSE: Select optional module to be licensed.
LICENSE CODE: Enter license code to enable selected optional
module.

DATE/TIME: Sets the time of the system clock.

ETHERNET CONFIG: Sets the instrument IP Address, Net Mask, and


Gateway for Ethernet communication.

SOUND: Activates or deactivates the beep sound when keys are pressed.

UPGRADE: Upgrades the firmware of the instrument.

LANGUAGE: Changes the language used of the instrument’s menu,


messages and information on the screen display.

SCREEN SAVER: Sets the time to enter into power saving mode. Power
saving mode is automatically activated when no key entry occurs during
the Sleep Time.

 Sleep Time setting range: 1~200 minutes.


 Power saving mode is turned off when Sleep Time is set to 0.

BRIGHTNESS: This key is used to adjust the brightness of the LCD


display. Adjustment can be made from 0 to 100% and the default setting is
30%.

FILE MANAGER: File manager provides following menu to copy or delete


the data of the instrument.

DELETE: Delete the selected file.


DELETE ALL: Delete all files saved in the instrument.
COPY TO USB: Copy the selected file to USB memory device.
COPY ALL TO USB: Copy all files from the instrument to USB
memory device.

Chapter 2
GETTING STARTED 2-9

DATA ENTRY KEY KNOB, The knob is used to allow incremental value changes by
predefined steps for settings such as carrier frequency, span, reference
level, attenuation, cable offset, or averaging or to move a marker on the
CH
trace. Rotating the knob clockwise increases the value or moves the
2
marker to the right and rotating the knob counterclockwise decreases the
value or moves the marker to the left. Incremental step values are set
differently for each function. The incremental step values can be
configured by the user.

ARROW, The arrow keys increases or decreases active function values. It


works similar as the knob, but it allows a more precise control.

DATA ENTRY, Data entry keys are used to enter values for many test
parameters. The value entered by the user is displayed on the screen and
the location of the display can be changed by the Display function.

DEL key is used to delete the entered values. Every time the DEL key is
pressed, it deletes the last value entered. DEL can’t remove values
entered with the Enter key or Unit key on the screen menu.

ENTER key is used to enter values without a specified unit via the Data
entry key. When the entered value requires a specific unit, soft keys in the
screen are display showing the available units which can be selected by
pressing the corresponding unit soft keys in the screen.

FREQ/CHAN Sets the frequency and selects a standard or custom band.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the


spectrum measurement screen. Values can be entered with the Data Entry
key or by rotating the Knob. If the Data Entry key is used the value is
completed by selecting the unit soft key on the screen key. If the knob or
the arrow keys are used the center frequency changes in predefined
frequency steps, which can be configured in the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the frequency step value of center frequency. Values


can be entered with the Data Entry key or changed with the knob. If the
Data Entry key is used the value is completed by selecting the unit soft
key on the screen. If the knob is used, the incremental value applied is
0.1MHz.

Chapter 2
2-10 GETTING STARTED

CHANNEL STANDARD: A Channel Standard is a list to select "Channel


(number)", not frequency. When the unit is changed to "Chan", then

CH selects "Channel standard" from the list, the Center Frequency of the
display screen will be mapped according to the selected channel
2
standard. Selected channel number will be a center frequency within a
channel standard you recalled.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When


the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

AMPLITUDE AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the
minimum and maximum values of a measurement on the Y-axis of the
graph for optimum display of the traces. Every time the AUTO SCALE key
is pressed, the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and
maximum values with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the maximum range in the Y axis when using
the spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer function.

Step Description

Amplitude Select from front Hard Key

[Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

<Enter values> Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

Knob Step= 10dB

Table 3 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

SCALE/DIV: Used only in Spectrum measurement screen, it represents


the value of one division on the horizontal scale. The default value is
10dB/Div and the Y-Scale is set to 100dB. Setting the value to 1dB per
division is possible with the Data Entry keys or the knob by selecting the
Scale Division key.

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended

Chapter 2
GETTING STARTED 2-11

to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level


CH
changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
2
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than


the allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the
!
user (total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input
attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be
displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input
attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to
an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over


Power Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and
!
the JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the
measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input
signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again
and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

PRE AMP: Enables/Disables the internal pre-amplifier. Preamplifier is to


amplify a low-level input signal.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

When an external offset value is set at 40dB in Spectrum Mode,


measurement result compensates 40dB at both Spectrum mode and
Analysis mode. However, if user resets external offset value as 35dB in
Analysis mode, 35dB offset value is applied only to the measurement
value made at Analysis mode, and the initial 40dB offset value remains for
the Spectrum mode.

Chapter 2
2-12 GETTING STARTED

TRACE/DISPLAY TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select
screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are

CH assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

2
TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press
the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with
View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores
hidden traces and information on the window.

 M: Max Hold
 m: Min Hold
 C: Captured Trace
 W: Current Trace
 L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned


trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger
trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller
trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared
traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces
cannot be restored.

Chapter 2
GETTING STARTED 2-13

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace
settings.

CH
BW/AVG AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the
2
trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between “Continue” and “Hold”.

MARKER Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six
Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X
and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on
any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y
coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to
the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be


changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active
markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s
number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker
View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In


the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions
when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has
been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:
Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the
reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between
two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,


1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a


Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a
Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes
the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X
and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

Chapter 2
2-14 GETTING STARTED

MARKER TABLE:
Displays a table that contains all activated Marker information on the

CH bottom side of the screen, when the marker table is activated all X and Y
coordinates of the activated markers are displayed. Depending on the
2
selection in Draw Type, the maximum number of markers on the table is 6.

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are
redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a
measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window


appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the
marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

MARKER  :
MARKERCF: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Center
frequency of the spectrum.
MARKERSTART: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Start
frequency of the spectrum.
MARKERSTOP: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Stop
frequency of the spectrum.

PEAK SEARCH Each time the Peak Search key is pressed, the Marker is positioned on
the highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the Marker to the highest peak to the right of its
current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves Marker to the highest peak to the left from its current
position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the Marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the Marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the Marker automatically to the highest peak of


the trace every time the trace is refreshed.

Chapter 2
GETTING STARTED 2-15

MEASURE MEASURE OFF: Turns off the current measurement, when this key is
selected while the instrument is in Tx Analyzer mode, the main mode will
be changed to Spectrum Analyzer mode.
CH
2
CHANNEL POWER: Channel Power measures the power within 1.23MHz
Bandwidth, and allows the user to set an Integration Bandwidth, Channel
Power Span, and the Average Number.

Measure Setup provides required settings for Channel Power


measurement. Also JDViewer, PC Application Software allows user to set
each parameter to import setting as a Mask.

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by


JDViewer, PC Application Software.

INTEGRATION BW: Sets the channel power measurement


bandwidth.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the


channel power.

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH: Occupied bandwidth is calculated as the


bandwidth containing 99% of the transmitted power. It also allows the user
to set the Occupied Bandwidth Power Percentage, Occupied Bandwidth
Span, and Average Number.

Measure Setup provides required settings for Occupied Bandwidth


measurement. Also JDViewer, PC Application Software allows user to set
each parameter to import setting as a Mask.

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by


JDViewer, PC Application Software.

OCC BW % PWR: Sets the measurement bandwidth in


percentage.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the


channel power.

Chapter 2
2-16 GETTING STARTED

SEM: Spurious Emission, Emission of a frequency which is outside the


necessary bandwidth and the level of which may be reduced without

CH affecting the corresponding transmission of the signal.

2
Measure Setup provides required setting for SEM measurement. Also
JDViewer, PC Application Software allows user to set each parameter to
import setting as a Mask.

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by


JDViewer, PC Application Software.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the


channel power.

ACP: ACP is defined as the ratio between the amount of leakage power in
an adjacent channel and the total transmitted power in the channel.

Measure Setup provided required setting for ACP measurement. Also


JDViewer, PC Application Software allows user to set each parameter to
import setting as a Mask.

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by


JDViewer, PC Application Software.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the


channel power.

AM/FM: The AM/FM demodulator operates using the power received from
radio waves and is designed for providing alternative way to identify
interfering signals.

DEMOD: Turns AM/FM Demodulator On/Off.

DEMOD AT: AM/FM Demodulator uses Marker position to


demodulate. There are 6 markers are available in different
frequencies and user can select the frequency to be
demodulated among M1 to M6.

Chapter 2
GETTING STARTED 2-17

DEMOD MODE: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be demodulated.

DWELL TIME: Sets interval of AM/FM demodulator. AM/FM


CH
Demodulator demodulates for a period of time set by Dwell Time.
2

VOLUME: Used to adjust volume.

AUTO GAIN: Used to adjust internal gain of demodulator.

MEASURE SETUP This key has different menus in conjunction with Measure key.
Operation in details will be described in each measurement mode.

Chapter 2
2-18 GETTING STARTED

TOP VIEW

CH
2

Chapter 2
GETTING STARTED 2-19

RF IN Is a precise 50ohm N-type female connector, used as the input signal port
for spectrum analysis, TX analysis and RF power measurements.

CH
The maximum power for RF In port is +30dBm. If the input
2
! power exceeds the maximum allowable limit, it will degrade the
product performance and in worst case can damage the
instrument. Do not connect any power feed exceeding 1W directly to the
RF input port of the instrument.

DC 15V ~ 19V IN DC 15V to 19V input port.

RF OUT Is a precise 50ohm N-type female connector, used as the output signal
port for Cable and antenna analyzer.

Do not apply or connect power to this RF Out port. If the power

! is applied, it will degrade the product performance and in worst


case can damage the product.

EXTERNAL IN GPS: Is a SMA type female connector used for GPS antenna providing
location information and highly accurate reference.

SYNC: Is a SMA type female connector used to receive PP2S clock or


10msec synchronization signals from an external timing reference.

REF: Is a SMA type female connector, used to receive 10MHz, 13MHz, or


15MHz reference clock signals from an external frequency sources.

SYS I/O RS-232C: A serial interface port used to interface with one of the optional
power sensors.

USB: A USB1.1 master port used for external USB memory to extend the
instrument’s storage capability or to upgrade the instrument’s firmware.
Supports most USB memory devices with 32bit file system.

LAN: Ethernet communication port to connect a PC with the application


software.

Chapter 2
2-20 GETTING STARTED

E1/T1 E1/T1 input port to detect error or alarm from E1/T1 signal and to transmit
test pattern to E1/T1 transmission line connected through RF-45 cable

CH provided as an accessory.

2
GRIP A Grip is to carry the instrument for short distance. It is recommended to
use the instrument’s carrying case to move the instrument for long
distance.

Chapter 2
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-1

3.0 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

CH
3
In this chapter
Spectrum Analyzer Introduction .................................................................................................................... 3-2
Spectrum Analysis ................................................................................................................................ 3-3
Measurements Types ........................................................................................................................... 3-4
What is Spectrum.................................................................................................................................. 3-5
RBW ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
VBW ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
RF Attenuation ...................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Using Spectrum Analyzer ............................................................................................................................. 3-8
How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................................. 3-9
ESC ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 3-9
Amplitude............................................................................................................................................ 3-10
Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 3-12
BW/AVG.............................................................................................................................................. 3-13
Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 3-14
Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 3-15
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 3-16
Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 3-18
Cable Connection ....................................................................................................................................... 3-19
Spectrum Analyzer Input Mode ................................................................................................................... 3-20
Select Channel Standard ............................................................................................................................ 3-21
Select Channel Standard .................................................................................................................... 3-22
Spectrum Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 3-23
Attenuation, Average, Trace/Display ................................................................................................... 3-24
Spectrum Measurement Screen ......................................................................................................... 3-25
Channel Power Measurement .................................................................................................................... 3-26
Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-26
Channel Power Measurement Screen ................................................................................................ 3-27
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement ............................................................................................................ 3-28
Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-28
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen........................................................................................ 3-29
SEM Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 3-30
Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-30
SEM Measurement Screen ................................................................................................................. 3-31
ACP Measurement ..................................................................................................................................... 3-32
Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-32
ACP Measurement Screen ................................................................................................................. 3-33
AM/FM Measurement ................................................................................................................................. 3-34
Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................................... 3-34

Chapter 3
3-2 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

SPECTRUM ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

This chapter provides the basic operation of the Spectrum Analysis


function of the JD7105A, as well as a description of measurements and
procedures when the JD7105A is in the Spectrum Analyzer Mode.

CH
3

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-3

SPECTRUM In this section, we will define spectrum analysis as well as present a brief
ANALYSIS introduction to the types of tests that are made with the spectrum and
signal analyzer functions. In order to make measurements on a signal
analyzer and to interpret the results correctly, it is important to understand
the characteristics of the analyzer.
CH
If you are designing, manufacturing, or doing field service/repair of
3
electrical devices or systems, you need a tool that will help you analyze
the electrical signals that are passing through or being transmitted by your
system or device. By analyzing the characteristics of the signal once its
gone through the device/system, you can determine the performance, find
problems, troubleshoot, etc.

For these type of measurements it is needed a passive receiver, which it


doesn’t affect the signal, it just displays it in a comprehensive way on the
frequency domain, this is called a spectrum analyzer. Spectrum analyzers
usually display raw, unprocessed signal information such as voltage,
power, period, wave shape, sidebands, and frequency.

Depending on the application, a signal could have several different


characteristics. For example, in communications, in order to send
information such as voice or data, it must be modulated onto a higher
frequency carrier. A modulated signal will have specific characteristics
depending on the type of modulation used. When testing non-linear
devices such as amplifiers or mixers, it is important to understand how
distortion can be created. Understanding the characteristics of noise and
how a noise signal looks compared to other types of signals helps to
analyze devices and/or systems.

Understanding the important aspects of a spectrum analyzer for


measuring all of these types of signals will help you make more accurate
measurements and give you confidence that you are interpreting the
results correctly.

Chapter 3
3-4 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

MEASUREMENTS The most common measurements of a spectrum analyzer are modulation,


TYPES distortion, and noise. These three terms encompass many different
measurements.

Measuring the quality of the modulation is important for making sure the

CH system is working properly and that the information is being transmitted


correctly. Understanding the spectral content is important, especially in
3
communications where there is very limited bandwidth. The amount of
power being transmitted (for example, to overcome the channel
impairments in wireless systems) is another key measurement in
communications. Tests such as error vector magnitude, rho, modulation
quality, and occupied bandwidth are examples of modulation
measurements.

In communications, it is critical to measure distortion for both the receiver


and transmitter. Excessive harmonic distortion at the output of a
transmitter can interfere with other communication bands. The pre-
amplification stages in a receiver must be free of inter-modulation
distortion to prevent signal crosstalk. An example is the inter-modulation of
cable TV carriers that moves down the trunk of the distribution system and
distorts other channels on the same cable. Common distortion
measurements include inter-modulation, harmonics, ACPR, and spurious
emissions.

Noise is the most standard measurement and even the transmitted signal
can be noisy by definition. Any active circuit or device will generate noise.
Tests such as noise figure and signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) are important
for characterizing the performance of a device and/or its contribution to the
overall system noise. Tests on signals that look like noise tend to be
channel power, and occupied bandwidth.

For all of these measurements on the spectrum analyzer mode, it is


important to understand the operation of the spectrum analyzer and the
spectrum analyzer performance requirements for the specific
measurements.

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-5

WHAT IS A spectrum is a collection of sine waves that, when properly combined


SPECTRUM produces a frequency-domain signal. Displaying complex signals a
frequency-domain provide an indication of its amplitude versus frequency
of each sine wave in the spectrum, making it easy to identify distorted
signals which contain multiple sine waves, as harmonics.
CH
Before we get into the details of describing a spectrum analyzer, we might
3
first ask ourselves: “Just what is a spectrum and why would we want to
analyze it?” Our normal frame of reference is time. We note when certain
events occur. This includes electrical events. We can use an oscilloscope
to view the instantaneous value of a particular electrical event (or some
other event converted to volts through an appropriate transducer) as a
function of time. In other words, we use the oscilloscope to view the
waveform of a signal in the time domain. Time domain measurements
are also required to identify pulse rise and fall times, overshoot, and
ringing.

Fourier theory explains that any time-domain signal is made up of one or


multiple sine waves of particular frequency, amplitude, and phase. In other
words, we can transform a time-domain signal into its frequency-domain
equivalent. Measurements in the frequency domain tell us how much
energy is present at each particular frequency. If the signal that we wish
to analyze is periodic, as in our case here, Fourier also explains that the
constituent sine waves are separated in the frequency domain by 1/T,
where T is the period of the signal.

The frequency domain measurements provide unique benefits. People


involved in wireless communications are extremely interested in out-of-
band and spurious emissions. For example, cellular radio systems must
be verified for harmonics of the carrier signal that might interfere with other
systems operating at the same frequencies as the harmonics. Engineers
and technicians are also very concerned about distortion of the message
modulated onto a carrier. Third-order intermodulation (two tones of a
complex signal modulating each other) can be particularly troublesome
because the distortion components can fall within the band of interest and
so will not be filtered away.

Chapter 3
3-6 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

RBW The major components in a spectrum analyzer are the RF input attenuator,
mixer, IF (Intermediate Frequency) gain, IF filter, detector, video filter, local
oscillator, sweep generator, and LCD display.

The IF filter is a band pass filter, used as a "window", to detect signals. Its

CH bandwidth is referred as the analyzer’s resolution bandwidth (RBW) and


can be configured via the front panel of the instrument.
3

The RBW is used to adjust the vertical position of a signal on the display
without affecting the signal level at the input mixer. When changed, the
value of the reference level is changed accordingly. Since the reference
level should not change (i.e. the vertical position of displayed signals) the
input attenuator also changes, these two components are tied together.
The IF gain will automatically be changed to compensate for input
attenuator changes, so signals remain stationary on the instrument’s
display, and the reference level is not changed.

By providing a broad range of variable resolution bandwidth settings, the


instrument can be optimized for sweep and signal conditions, combining
frequency selectivity (the ability to resolve signals), signal-to-noise ratio
(SNR), and measurement speed.

When the RBW is narrowed, selectivity is improved (resolving both input


signals). This will also improve SNR. The sweep speed and trace update
rate, however, will degrade with a narrower RBWs. The optimum RBW
setting depends heavily on the characteristics of the signals of interest.

VBW The video bandwidth (VBW) consists of a video filter as a low-pass filter
located after the envelope detector. This filter determines the bandwidth of
the video amplifier, and is used to average or smooth the trace displayed
by the instrument.

The spectrum analyzer displays the signal and noise so the closer a signal
is to the noise level; the more difficult is to be identified. By changing the
VBW, the peak-to-peak variations of noise can be decreased.

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-7

This type of signal smoothing is used to locate signals that otherwise


might be masked with noise. Changing the VBW does not improve
sensitivity; however, it does improve identification and repeatability when
making low-level measurements.

As a general rule, most field spectrum analyzer measurements are made CH


at a video bandwidth that is a factor of 10 to 100 less than the resolution
3
bandwidth. Thus, for a resolution bandwidth of 30 kHz, the typical video
bandwidth setting options are either 3 kHz or 300 Hz.

RF ATTENUATION The RF Input Attenuator is a step attenuator located between the input
connector and the first mixer. It is also called the RF attenuator. It is used
to adjust the level of the signal incident upon the first mixer in order to
prevent a mixer gain compression and distortion due to high-level and/or
broadband signals.

An important aspect of the analyzer's internal noise that is often


overlooked is its effective level as a function of the RF input attenuator
setting. Since the internal noise is generated after the mixer, the RF input
attenuator has no effect on the actual noise level. However, the RF input
attenuator does affect the signal level at the input and therefore decreases
the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the analyzer. The best SNR is with the
lowest possible RF input attenuation.

The RF input attenuator and IF gain are tied together, therefore, as the RF
input attenuation is increased by 10 dB, the IF gain will simultaneously
increase by 10 dB to compensate for the loss. As a result the signal
displayed stays constant, but the (amplified) noise level is increases by 10
dB.

Chapter 3
3-8 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

USING SPECTRUM ANALYZER

The advantage of the Spectrum Analyzer is easy to verify the presence of


unwanted signals such as spurious and harmonics, which is normally very
hard to identify in Time domain analysis. Performance assurance in

CH wireless communication systems includes the observation of the out-of-


band signal characteristics in order to identify the presence of harmonic
3
signals. Harmonic signals of a carrier may interfere with other signals far
out of the transmission band, or harmonic signals from other transmitter
may interfere with in band signals affecting the spectral integrity.

In these days when wide variety of wireless communication services are


provided in frequency bands assigned very closely to each other, it is
critical to ensure that each communication service is carried out within
their assigned frequency band minimizing interference with adjacent
frequency bands. So, the Adjacent Channel Power Ratio, ACPR
characteristic of a power amplifier or other RF components is an important
factor in evaluating the system performance.

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-9

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides a description of the instrument's keys used in the


Spectrum Analyzer mode.
Soft Keys
SOFT KEYS Soft keys are used to activate a specific function, invoke other screen keys, CH
or to input specific value units. Selecting soft keys will highlight its caption
3
to show its selection. In case the soft keys are in the same layer but
cannot be displayed, the “More” or “▶” key on the bottom corner will be
displayed indicating the existence of additional soft keys.
ESC
ESC The ESC key is used to move to the previous Menu without changing the
current setup.
Freq/Chan
FREQ/CHAN Sets the frequency band with either standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the


spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,
the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is
completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.
When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in
predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured
selecting the CF Step Menu.

SPAN: This key is used to set the frequency range over which the
instrument will sweep.

START FREQUENCY: Changes the Start frequency in the spectrum


measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or
the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by
selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

STOP FREQUENCY: Changes the Stop frequency in the spectrum


measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or
the arrow keys. When the Data Entry key is used the input is completed by
selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

Chapter 3
3-10 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be


entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data
Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value.
When using the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased
by 0.1MHz.

CH
CHANNEL STANDARD: A Channel Standard is a list to select "Channel
3
(number)", not frequency. When the unit is changed to "Chan", then
selects "Channel standard" from the list, the Center Frequency of the
display screen will be mapped according to the selected Channel standard.
Selected channel number will be a center frequency within a list you
recalled.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When


the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

AMPLITUDE AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the
minimum and maximum values on the Y-axis of the graph for optimum
display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,
the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values
with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the maximum Y-axis range when using the
spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer functions.

Step Description

Amplitude Select from front Hard Key

[Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

<Enter values> or rotate Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key or

Knob Knob (changes by 10dB step)

[dBm] Select from Screen Menu

Table 4 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

SCALE/DIV: Used only in Spectrum measurement screen, it represents


the value of one division on the horizontal scale. The default value is
10dB/Div and the Y-Scale is set to 100dB. Setting the value to 1dB per
division is possible with the Data Entry keys or the knob by selecting the
Scale Division key.

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-11

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended
to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.
CH
MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level
3
changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the
allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user
!
(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input
attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be
displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input
attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to
an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power


Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the
!
JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the
measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input
signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again
and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

PRE AMP: Enables/Disables the internal pre-amplifier. Preamplifier is to


amplify a low-level input signal.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

When an external offset value is set at 40dB in Spectrum Mode,


measurement result compensates 40dB at both Spectrum mode and

Chapter 3
3-12 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Analysis mode. However, if user resets external offset value as 35dB in


Analysis mode, 35dB offset value is applied only to the measurement
value made at Analysis mode, and the initial 40dB offset value remains for
the Spectrum mode.

CH TRACE/DISPLAY TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select
screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are
3
assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press
the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with
View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores
hidden traces and information on the window.

 M: Max Hold
 m: Min Hold
 C: Captured Trace
 W: Current Trace
 L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned


trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger
trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller
trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared
traces cannot be restored.

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-13

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces
cannot be restored.
CH
CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace
3
settings.

BW/AVG RBW: Sets the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) of the Spectrum Analyzer.
RBW can be set from 10Hz to 300kHz in 1-3 sequence.

VBW/RBW: Sets proportional VBW based on the designated RBW. For


user’s better understanding of the rather complicated formula, the
following table shows the VBW setting in proportion to the VBW/RBW ratio
at 30kHz RBW setting.

RBW VBW/RBW VBW

30kHz 1:1 30kHz

1:0.3 10kHz

1:0.1 3kHz

1:0.03 1kHz

1:0.01 300Hz

1:0.003 100Hz

Table 5 – VBW Corresponding to VBW/RBW Ratio

The applicable VBW value is based on the VBW/RBW ratio displayed on


the lower half of the measurement screen.

SPAN/RBW: Selects the ratio between span and resolution bandwidth.


When the frequency span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is changed
to meet the selected ratio.

AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the


trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

Chapter 3
3-14 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

MARKER Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six
Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X
and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on
any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y
coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to

CH the description of each measurement after this chapter.

3
MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be
changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active
markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s
number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker
View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In


the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions
when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has
been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:
Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the
reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between
two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,


1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a


Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a
Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes
the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X
and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

MARKER TABLE:
Displays a table that contains all activated Marker information on the
bottom side of the screen, when the marker table is activated all X and Y
coordinates of the activated markers are displayed. Depending on the
selection in Draw Type, the maximum number of markers on the table is 6.

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-15

Marker (Cont’d) MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are
redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a
measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window


appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the CH
marker position is moved to the setting frequency.
3

MARKER  :
MARKERCF: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Center
frequency of the spectrum.
MARKERSTART: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Start
frequency of the spectrum.
MARKERSTOP: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Stop
frequency of the spectrum.

PEAK SEARCH Each time the peak search key is pressed a marker is displayed on the
highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its
current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its
current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of


the trace each time the trace is updated.

MEASURE The Measure key selects the following measurements in Spectrum mode.
 Channel Power
 Occupied Bandwidth
 SEM (Spectrum Emission Mask)
 ACP (Adjacent Channel Power)
 AM/FM

Chapter 3
3-16 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

MEASURE SETUP When “Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM, ACP and AM/FM
mode” is selected, then Measure Setup provides the following
measurement parameters:

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENTS:

CH
MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by
3
JDViewer, PC Application Software.

INTEGRATION BW: Sets the channel power measurement


bandwidth.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the


channel power.

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENTS:

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by


JDViewer, PC Application Software.

OCC BW % PWR: Sets the measurement bandwidth in


percentage.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the


channel power.

SEM MEASUREMENTS:

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by


JDViewer, PC Application Software.

LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the


channel power.

ACP MEASUREMENTS:

MASK NAME: Used to import a Mask file that generated by


JDViewer, PC Application Software.

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-17

Measure Setup LIMIT ON/OFF: Enables/disables the high and low limits of the
(Cont’d) channel power.

AM/FM:

DEMOD: Turns AM/FM Demodulator On/Off. CH


3
DEMOD AT: AM/FM Demodulator uses Marker position to
demodulate. There are 6 markers are available in different
frequencies and user can select the frequency to be
demodulated among M1 to M6.

DEMOD MODE: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be demodulated.

DWELL TIME: Sets interval of AM/FM demodulator. AM/FM


Demodulator demodulates for a period of time set by Dwell Time.

VOLUME: Used to adjust volume.

AUTO GAIN: Used to adjust internal gain of demodulator.

Chapter 3
3-18 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW

CH
3

Figure 1 – Overview of Spectrum Analyzer Display

① Reference Level, Scale Division, etc: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale


information
② Input Attenuation Information
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Number of Averaging
④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value
⑤ Span Setting Information
⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information
⑦ Trace Information
C: Captured, M: Max Hold, m: Min Hold
⑧ Information on Marker Tables.
⑨ Information on Active Marker
⑩ Frequency selection key
⑪ Channel Standard selection button.
⑫ Unit selection key, choose either Frequency or Channel

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-19

CABLE CONNECTION

The maximum power for the RF-In port is 30dBm (1 Watt). If


the input signal level to be measured is greater than 30dBm,
!
use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage when you
directly connect the signal to the instrument. Or, connect a signal from the CH
coupling port of a directional coupler. 3
Direct Connection

Direct Connection

Figure 2 – PA Output Port and RF In Port Connection

Indirect Connection
Indirect Connection

Figure 3 – Monitor Port and RF In Port Connection

Chapter 3
3-20 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

SPECTRUM ANALYZER INPUT MODE

The input circuit of the Spectrum Analyzer consists of an attenuator and an


amplifier. The function of the input circuit is to control the power level of

CH the input signal. If the input signal level is too high, the input circuit is
saturated resulting in a distorted signal. On the other hand, if the input
3
signal is too low, the S/N ratio becomes worse and makes it difficult to
perform an accurate measurement.

The default settings of the Spectrum measurement are the following:

 Ref Level: 0dBm


 Atten Mode: Auto
 Attenuation: 20dB
 RBW: 30kHz
 VBW: 30kHz
 Scale/Div: 10dB
 Average: Off

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-21

SELECT CHANNEL STANDARD

Once a channel standard is selected, user can analyze the specific


channel by simply entering the channel number even without knowing the
particular center frequency of the carriers. By selecting the unit in
Freq/Chan to Chan, the center frequency setting method will be changed CH
to Channel number. The Channel standard is applicable to the following
3
settings:

 Spectrum Analyzer
 Channel Scanner
 Interference Analyzer
 Tx Analyzer
 Power Meter

The channel standard in the instrument supports various signal standards.


(The APPENDIX D. BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD shows a table of
the signal standards available in the instrument).

 Press the Freq/Chan key to display the Frequency menu


 Press the Channel Standard soft key and use the Up/down Keys or
Knob to select the desired channel standard. (Whenever the channel
standard would be changed, the lowest channel number for the
standard is automatically assigned in the channel.)

Chapter 3
3-22 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Select Channel User can recall the setting of each standard channel band from pre-
Standard defined list of the instrument. When you change the display unit to "Chan",
and then select "Channel standard" from the list, the center frequency of
the display screen will be mapped according to the selected channel
standard (you will see channel number on the top of the screen menu).

CH The selected channel number will become the center frequency of the
band selected.
3

Step Description

Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Select from front hard key

[Unit] Change the unit to “Chan”

<Freq/Chan>

[Channel Std.] Select std. from the list

<Browse and select Frequency Band> Using Knob and Up/Down arrow

key

[Select] Select from screen menu

Table 6 – Select Channel Standard

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-23

SPECTRUM MEASUREMENT

Step Description

Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss
was measured

Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode CH


[Spectrum]
3
Freq/Chan Set Frequency
[Start Freq]
[Stop Freq]
[Center Freq]
or
[Center Freq]
[Span]
or
[Unit]
<Freq/Chan> Select Chan
[Channel Standard] Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down
Arrow key
<Select>
Amplitude Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale
[Reference Level]
[Scale Division]
[Auto Atten] To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look
for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step
Marker Set Marker
[Marker Select] Select M1 ~ M6
[Marker View] On/Off
[Marker Type] Normal/Delta
[Marker Table] When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative
coordinates of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table
Type frequency to set Marker
[Marker Edit]
[Marker ]
<Marker  CF> Set current Marker frequency to center frequency
<Marker  Start> Set current Marker frequency to start frequency
<Marker  Stop> Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency
BW/AVG Set RBW/VBW and Average
[RBW]
[VBW/RBW] Select RBW from screen key
1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003
[SPAN/VBW]
Table 7 – Spectrum Measurement Procedure

Chapter 3
3-24 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

Attenuation, Step Description

Average, Amplitude Auto Atten Mode is default at Analysis

Trace/Display [Attenuator] Set Atten Mode as Manual to change the

<Manual/Auto> attenuation value

<Manual> If Manual is selected

CH {Data Entry Key/Knob} Type attenuation value, attenuation

setting range: 0 ~ 55dB, 5dB Step


3
BW/AVG Enter number of averaging to set

[Average] When Averaging reaches the set number,

{Data Entry Key} a new measurement value replaces the

[Enter] earliest measurement value in sequence

Average: 1~99

Trace/Display Default status is all trace off

[Trace Select] Select Active Trace from T1 ~ T6

[Max Hold]/[Min Hold] Assign attributes of the Trace

[Trace Capture] Stop updating the trace and captures

current trace to memory

[Trace View On] or [Trace View Off] View or hide Active Trace on the screen

[Trace Clear]

<Clear Current> or <Clear All> Clear Active Trace or all Traces

permanently

Table 8 – Attenuation, Average, Trace/Display

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-25

Spectrum
Measurement
Screen

CH
3

Figure 4 – Example of Spectrum Measurement Screen

Chapter 3
3-26 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

CHANNEL POWER MEASUREMENT

Channel Power measures the integrated power in a specific frequency


span displayed on the spectrum window. As the frequency band can be
configured, it is useful to measure channel power or total power. The

CH following are the limitations of band power measurement.

3
 Maximum available span to set: 60MHz
 RBW: 10kHz to 1MHz

Band power measurement is made by calculating the power within the


specified band span and integrating the data point displayed on the screen.
Selecting the span larger than 15MHz may cause a measurement error. It
is recommended to use the RF power meter function to measure total
power accurately.
Measurement Procedure
Measurement Step Description
Procedure Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency

[Center Freq]

{Input center freq} Using Data Entry Key

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Freq/Chan

[Span] Set Span

{Input span} Using Data Entry Key

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Measure Select Channel Power Measurement

[Channel Power]

Measure Setup Set internal parameters

[Mask Name] Recalls Mask file

[Integration BW] Set Bandwidth to be measured

[Limit] Enable or Disable Limit

Table 9 – Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-27

Channel Power The following figure shows the measurement result of a Channel Power
Measurement for cdmaOne/cdma2000 Single FA; where the channel power span is set
Screen to 1.23MHz (on the lower right corner of the screen).

CH
3

Figure 5 – Example of Channel Power Measurement Screen

Chapter 3
3-28 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

OCCUPIED BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT


Measurement Procedure
Occupied bandwidth measures the percentage of the transmitted power
within a specified bandwidth. This percentage is typically 99%.

CH  Maximum available span to set: 15MHz


 RBW: 10kHz to 1MHz
3

Measurement Step Description


Procedure Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency

[Center Freq]

{Input center freq} Using Data Entry Key

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Freq/Chan

[Span] Set Span

{Input span} Using Data Entry Key

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Measure Select Occupied Bandwidth

[Occupied BW] Measurement

Measure Setup Set internal parameters

[Mask Name] Recalls Mask file

[OCC BW % PWR] Set % of Power within Bandwidth to be

measured

[Limit] Enable or Disable Limit

Table 10 – Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-29

Occupied
Bandwidth
Measurement
Screen

CH
3

Figure 6 – Example of Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

Chapter 3
3-30 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

SEM MEASUREMENT
Measurement Procedure
Spurious Emission has the commonality with ACPR measurement that it
measures the interference of adjacent channels. It measures the power
ratio between in-band and adjacent channels.

CH
 Maximum available span to set: 15MHz
3
 RBW: 10kHz to 1MHz

Measurement Step Description


Procedure Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency

[Center Freq]

{Input center freq} Using Data Entry Key

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Freq/Chan

[Span] Set Span

{Input span} Using Data Entry Key

GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Measure Select SEM Measurement

[SEM]
Measure Setup Set internal parameters

[Mask Name] Recalls Mask file

[Limit] Enable or Disable Limit

Table 11 – SEM Measurement Procedure

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-31

SEM Measurement
Screen

CH
3

Figure 7 – Example of SEM Measurement Screen

Chapter 3
3-32 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

ACP MEASUREMENT
Measurement Procedure
Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR) is the power contained in a
specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the total carrier power. It
may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral densities between the

CH carrier and the specified offset frequency band. This is also called
Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR).
3

 Maximum available span to set: 15MHz


 RBW: 10kHz to 1MHz

Measurement
Step Description
Procedure
Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency

[Center Freq]

{Input center freq} Using Data Entry Key

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Freq/Chan

[Span] Set Span

{Input span} Using Data Entry Key

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Measure Select ACP Measurement

[ACP]

Measure Setup Set internal parameters

[Mask Name] Recalls Mask file

[Limit] Enable or Disable Limit

Table 12 – ACP Measurement Procedure

Chapter 3
SPECTRUM ANALYZER 3-33

ACP Measurement
Screen

CH
3

Figure 8 – Example of ACP Measurement Screen

Chapter 3
3-34 SPECTRUM ANALYZER

AM/FM MEASUREMENT
Measurement Procedure
The AM/FM demodulator operates using the power received from radio
waves and is designed for providing alternative way to identify interfering
signals.

CH
Measurement
3 Step Description
Procedure Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode

[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency

[Center Freq]

{Input center freq} Using Data Entry Key

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Freq/Chan

[Span] Set Span

{Input span} Using Data Entry Key

[GHz]/[MHz]/[KHz]

Measure Select AM/FM Measurement

[AM/FM]

Marker Place Marker where frequency to be

demodulated

[Marker Select] Select M1 ~ M6

[Marker View] On/Off

[Demod Mode] Select modulation type, AM, FM, CW

[Dwell Time] Set interval

[Demod At] Select Marker where demodulate (M1 ~ M6)

[Volume] Set Volume

[Demod] Enable or Disable

<On>/<Off>

Table 13 – AM/FM Measurement Procedure

Chapter 3
INTERFERENCE ANALYZER 4-1

4.0 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

In this chapter
CH
Interference Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................................................ 4-2 4
Spectrogram ......................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) ........................................................................................... 4-3
How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
ESC ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 4-4
Amplitude.............................................................................................................................................. 4-5
Trace/Display ........................................................................................................................................ 4-7
BW/AVG................................................................................................................................................ 4-7
Marker .................................................................................................................................................. 4-8
Peak Search ......................................................................................................................................... 4-9
Measure ................................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 4-9
Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 4-10
Cable Connection ....................................................................................................................................... 4-12
Making Measurements ............................................................................................................................... 4-13
Spectrogram ....................................................................................................................................... 4-14
RSSI ................................................................................................................................................... 4-15

Chapter 4
4-2 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

INTERFERENCE ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

Interference is becoming more prevalent in the wireless community with


the increasing number of transmitters coming on the air. Wireless service
providers have traditionally used spectrum analyzers to monitor service
channels, frequencies, adjacent spectrum, and to locate sources of
interference. Unfortunately, a spectrum analyzer can only show the
interfering signal to the user, who must then determine the source of the
interference. To solve interference problems, the user must understand the
CH
RF environment, know which transmitters are operating nearby, and
4
identify any new or unlicensed emitters.

The complete hardware and software solution of the JD7105A is more


efficient and economical than most bench-top spectrum analyzers alone.
The JD7105A is a hand-held system, highly functional, and requires no
software development.

Users can record and view multiple frequency bands on a single JD7105A
to quickly resolve interference issues in a few steps. The system also
performs unattended data logging for hours, days, or even weeks for later
analysis, further reducing time spent in the field. Users can also save time
and money by remotely monitoring test locations and changing test
scenarios over an Ethernet connection, eliminating the need to travel to
and from test locations.

With the logging capability, users can collect data and essentially perform
unattended spectrum monitoring, capturing and storing the spectral data
to perform other tasks instead of spending time watching a display. By
logging data, the operator can see not only the event of interest, but also
the spectral data before and after the event.

Using the JD7105A is an excellent hand-held solution for customers who


need a spectrum monitoring solution but do not want to spend the time
developing their own code.

Chapter 4
INTERFERENCE ANALYZER 4-3

SPECTROGRAM The Spectrogram mode is useful for tracking down the source of an
interfering signal. This measurement is done at user defined frequency
range. The power at a frequency (in dBm) is displayed along with a
spectrogram. This mode is especially useful when attempting to locate
an emitter using a directional antenna.

If you are using a directional antenna to receive the signal, you will see a
change in the amplitude of the tracked signal as you change the direction
of the antenna, and see a change in the Spectrogram color. The source of
CH
the signal is located in the direction that results in the highest signal
4
strength.

A spectrogram is a three dimensional display.


 The horizontal line or X-Axis of the spectrogram is frequency
 The vertical line or Y-axis is time
 And the color identification (spectrogram) indicates power level of the
tracked signal. As the signal strength increases, the color on the
spectrogram will change accordingly.

RECEIVED SIGNAL The RSSI - Received Signal Strength Indicator, is useful for observing
STRENGTH power levels of different frequencies over time.
INDICATOR (RSSI)

Chapter 4
4-4 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides the key aspects of the instrument’s keys in the
interference analyzer mode.
Soft Keys
SOFT KEYS Soft keys are used to activate a specific function, invoke other screen keys,
or to input specific value units. Selecting soft keys will highlight its caption
to show its selection. In case the soft keys are in the same layer but
cannot be displayed, the “More” or “▶” key on the bottom corner will be
CH
displayed indicating the existence of additional soft keys.
4
ESC
ESC The ESC key is used to move to the previous Menu without changing the
current setup.
Freq/Chan
FREQ/CHAN Sets the frequency band with either standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the


spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,
the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is
completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.
When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in
predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured
selecting the CF Step Menu.

SPAN: This key is used to set the frequency range over which the
instrument will sweep.

START FREQUENCY: Changes the Start frequency in the spectrum


measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or
the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by
selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

STOP FREQUENCY: Changes the Stop frequency in the spectrum


measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or
the arrow keys. When the Data Entry key is used the input is completed by
selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

Chapter 4
INTERFERENCE ANALYZER 4-5

CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be


entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data
Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value.
When using the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased
by 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected
without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequency. The saved custom
channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

CH
UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When
4
the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

AMPLITUDE AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the
minimum and maximum values off the Y-axis of the graph for optimum
display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,
the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values
with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the maximum Y-axis range when using the
spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer functions.

Step Description

Amplitude Select from front Hard Key

[Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

<Enter values> Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

[dBm] Select from Screen Menu

Table 14 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

SCALE DIVISION: Used only in Spectrum measurement screen, it


represents the value of one division on the horizontal scale. The default
value is 10dB/Div and the Y-Scale is set to 100dB. Setting the value to
1dB per division is possible with the Data Entry keys or the knob by
selecting the Scale Division key.

Chapter 4
4-6 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended
to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level


changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.
CH
4
If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the
allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user
!
(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input
attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be
displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input
attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to
an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power


Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the
!
JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the
measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input
signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again
and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

PRE AMP: Enables/Disables the internal pre-amplifier. Preamplifier is to


amplify a low-level input signal.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

When an external offset value is set at 40dB in Spectrum Mode,


measurement result compensates 40dB at both Spectrum mode and

Chapter 4
INTERFERENCE ANALYZER 4-7

Analysis mode. However, if user resets external offset value as 35dB in


Analysis mode, 35dB offset value is applied only to the measurement
value made at Analysis mode, and the initial 40dB offset value remains for
the Spectrum mode.

TRACE/DISPLAY This key is not used in Interference Analyzer measurement mode.

BW/AVG RBW: Sets the Resolution Bandwidth (RBW) of the Spectrum Analyzer.
CH
RBW can be set from 10Hz to 300KHz in 1-3 sequence.
4

VBW/RBW: Sets proportional VBW based on the designated RBW. For


user’s better understanding of the rather complicated formula, he following
table shows the VBW setting in proportion to the VBW/RBW ratio at
30KHz RBW setting.

RBW VBW/RBW VBW

30kHz 1:1 30kHz

1:0.3 10kHz

1:0.1 3kHz

1:0.03 1kHz

1:0.01 300Hz

1:0.003 100Hz

Table 15 – VBW Corresponding to VBW/RBW Ratio

The applicable VBW value is based on the VBW/RBW ratio displayed on


the lower half of the measurement screen.

SPAN/RBW: Selects the ratio between span and resolution bandwidth.


When the frequency span is changed, the resolution bandwidth is changed
to meet the selected ratio.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

Chapter 4
4-8 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

MARKER Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six
Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X
and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on
any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y
coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to
the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be


changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active
CH
markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s
4
number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker
View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In


the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions
when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has
been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:
Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the
reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between
two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,


1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a


Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a
Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes
the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X
and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

MARKER TABLE:
Displays a table that contains all activated Marker information on the
bottom side of the screen, when the marker table is activated all X and Y
coordinates of the activated markers are displayed. Depending on the
selection in Draw Type, the maximum number of markers on the table is 6.

Chapter 4
INTERFERENCE ANALYZER 4-9

Marker (Cont’d) MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are
redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a
measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window


appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the
marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

MARKER  :
CH
MARKERCF: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Center
4
frequency of the spectrum.
MARKERSTART: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Start
frequency of the spectrum.
MARKERSTOP: Marker’s X coordinate is set as the Stop
frequency of the spectrum.

PEAK SEARCH Each time the peak search key is pressed a marker is displayed on the
highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its
current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its
current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of


the trace each time the trace is updated.

MEASURE The Measure key selects “Spectrogram & RSSI” modes.

MEASURE SETUP When “Interference Analyzer” is selected, then Measure Setup provides
the following measurement parameters:

SPECTROGRAM MEASUREMENTS:
 Restart: Restarts the measurement.

Chapter 4
4-10 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

 Time Interval: Sets the time interval.


 Auto Save: Saves the measurement data automatically to external
memory, USB.
 Time Cursor: Sets the time cursor indicator (1~400).

RSSI MEASUREMENTS:
 Restart: Restarts the measurement.
 Alarm: Sets an alarm for up to 6 different frequencies.
 Set Mask Value: Sets the mask value.
CH
 Auto Save: Saves the measurement data automatically to external
4
memory, USB.

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW

Figure 9 – Overview of Interference Analyzer Display (Spectrogram)

① Reference Level, Scale Division of the Spectrum Window’s Y Scale


information
② Input Attenuation Information
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Number of Averaging
④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value
⑤ Span Setting Information
⑥ Color identification (spectrogram) indicates power level of the
tracked signal
⑦ Restart measurement, by pressing Restart screen button, the
previous measurement will be disappear and restarted.
⑧ Set Time Interval, sets the interval of the measurement

Chapter 4
INTERFERENCE ANALYZER 4-11

⑨ Auto Save, saves the measurement data into data file


⑩ Set Time Cursor Indication, there are 400 measurement traces in a
single screen, user can check the previous measurement history by
setting Time Cursor

1 7
CH
8
2 4
9

3 10

Figure 10 – Overview of Interference Analyzer Display (RSSI)

① Reference Level, Scale Division of the Spectrum Window’s Y Scale


information
② Input Attenuation Information
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value
④ Span Setting Information
⑤ Alarm Mask Level Setting Information
⑥ Alarm Count Information, shows the number of alarms exceeded
user mask
⑦ Restart measurement, by pressing Restart screen button, the
previous measurement will be disappear and restarted.
⑧ Set Alarm (Marker1 ~ Marker6), user can set alarms individually up
to 6 different markers
⑨ Set Mask Level, sets the level of alarm mask
⑩ Auto Save, saves the measurement data into data file

Chapter 4
4-12 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

CABLE CONNECTION

The maximum power for the RF-In port is 30dBm (1 Watt). If


the input signal level to be measured is greater than 30dBm,
!
use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage when you
directly connect the signal to the instrument. Or, connect a signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

CH
Connection
4

Figure 11 – Connection for Interference Analyzer

Chapter 4
INTERFERENCE ANALYZER 4-13

MAKING MEASUREMENTS

The key measurement parameters of an interference analyzer are:

 Spectrogram
 RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indicator)

Once it has been identified a potential interfering signal using the


Spectrum Analyzer, you can use the interference analyzer function further
CH
monitor the signal.
4

The typical steps to locate interference signals using the JD7105A Base
Station Analyzer are as follows:

1. Select Interference Analyzer mode.


2. Look at the spectrum on the bottom of the spectrogram display to
locate the suspected interfering signal.
3. Set a marker on the trace at the frequency of the interfering signal.
Try to use different markers at the different frequencies (you can
use up to 6 markers on 6 different frequencies).
4. Look at the assignments for these frequencies readout at the
bottom of the spectrum display.
5. Set time interval, which the spectrogram will be saved.
6. Select the RSSI mode to track in more detail the signals identified
with the markers (6 different frequency components are available
in one display). This will provide the power components on
those set frequencies over time.

The typical operating procedure to identify interference signal is as


follows:

Chapter 4
4-14 INTERFERENCE ANALYZER

SPECTROGRAM

Step Description

Connect Antenna Connect antenna to RF In port

Mode

[Interference Analyzer] Select Interference Analyzer mode

[Spectrogram] Select spectrogram view

Freq/Chan Set Frequency


CH
[Start Freq]
4 [Stop Freq]

[Center Freq]

or

[Center Freq]

[Span]

or

Select [Channel Standard]

Amplitude Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale

[Reference Level]

[Scale Division] To optimize S/N, change Atten mode

[Auto Atten] to manual and look for optimization

value by changing Atten in 5dB step

Marker Set Marker to either carrier frequency

[Marker Select] or the interfering signal(M1 ~ M6)

[Marker View] On/Off

Absolute or relative coordinates of all

Maker are displayed on spectrum

waveform screen

Measure Setup Set the time interval

[Time Interval]

{Enter value}
Set measurement interval

[Auto Save] Set Auto save

<On/Off>

Table 16 – Interference Analysis in Spectrogram View

Chapter 4
INTERFERENCE ANALYZER 4-15

RSSI
Step Description

Sets Marker(s) in Spectrogram mode where to

need further analysis, then

Measure Select RSSI mode

[RSSI]

[Alarm Mask] Set Alarm Mask

[M1] ~ [M6]

<On/Off>

[Set Mask Value] Set Mask value for alarm CH


{Enter Value} Enter Mask Value using Data Entry key 4
[Auto Save] Set Auto save

<On/Off>

Table 17 – Interference Analysis in RSSI View

Chapter 4
CHANNEL SCANNER 5-1

5.0 CHANNEL SCANNER

In this chapter
Channel Scanner Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 5-2
How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Soft Keys .............................................................................................................................................. 5-3
ESC ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-3
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 5-3
CH
Trace/Display ........................................................................................................................................ 5-4
BW/AVG................................................................................................................................................ 5-4 5
Marker .................................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Peak Search ......................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Measure ................................................................................................................................................ 5-5
Measure setup ...................................................................................................................................... 5-5
Display Overview (General Channel Scanner ) .................................................................................... 5-6
Display Overview (GSM Channel Scanner) .......................................................................................... 5-7
Cable Connection ......................................................................................................................................... 5-8
Making Measurements ................................................................................................................................. 5-9
General Channel Scanner .................................................................................................................. 5-10
GSM Channel scanner ....................................................................................................................... 5-10

Chapter 5
5-2 CHANNEL SCANNER

CHANNEL SCANNER INTRODUCTION

A Channel Scanner is a radio receiver that can automatically tune, or scan,


two or more discrete frequencies & multi-channels, indicating when it finds
a signal on one of them and then continuing scanning when that frequency
goes silent.

There are two different types of channel scanner functionalities in the


JD7105A, general channel scanner and GSM channel scanner. The
general channel scanner can measure up to 20 channels in GSM, CDMA
or WCDMA networks. Using existing format-based or custom parameters,
the user will be able to easily verify improper multi-channel power levels.
CH
5 The GSM channel scanner has the function to display channel power and
related information up to 128 GSM down link signals. This channel
scanner can quickly identifies improper power levels that affect network
performance; this can be done either over the air or directly connected to
the cell site.

Chapter 5
CHANNEL SCANNER 5-3

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides the key aspects of the instrument’s keys in the
General Channel Scanner mode.
Soft Keys
SOFT KEYS Soft keys are used to activate a specific function, invoke other screen keys,
or to input specific value units. Selecting soft keys will highlight its caption
to show its selection. In case the soft keys are in the same layer but
cannot be displayed, the “More” or “▶” key on the bottom corner will
display another screen menu.
ESC
ESC The ESC key is used to move to the previous Menu without changing the
CH
current setup.
Freq/Chan 5
FREQ/CHAN For General Channel Scanner Mode, the following soft keys are available:

SCAN MODE: Changes the scan modes.


 List: Calls up the list stored in the instrument.
 Range: Sets frequency range to be scanned.

START: Changes the Start frequency in the channel scanner. Values can
be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or the arrow keys. When
using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by selecting the soft key
with the corresponding value unit.

STEP SIZE: Sets frequency step incremental size.

INTEGRATED BANDWIDTH: Sets bandwidth to be measured.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected
without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom
channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

CS UNIT: Selects the unit of either the Frequency or the Channel. When
the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

Chapter 5
5-4 CHANNEL SCANNER

For GSM Channel Scanner Mode, the following soft keys are available:

SCAN MODE: Changes the scan modes.


 Range: Sets frequency range to be scanned.

START FREQ: Changes the Start frequency in the channel scanner.


Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or the arrow keys.
When using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by selecting the
soft key with the corresponding value unit.

NUMBER OF CHANNELS: Sets the number of channel to be scanned.

CH
CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected
5 without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom
channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When


the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.

TRACE/DISPLAY This key is not used in General Channel Scanner mode.

When the instrument is in GSM Channel Scanner Mode, a


Trace/Display key is used as below.

ZOOM START FREQ: Selects the start frequency of the zoomed screen.

BW/AVG For General Channel Scanner Mode, the following soft keys are available:

AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the


trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and


"Hold".

For GSM Channel Scanner Mode, the following soft keys are available:

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and


"Hold".

Chapter 5
CHANNEL SCANNER 5-5

MARKER This key is not used in General or GSM Channel Scanner modes.

PEAK SEARCH This key is not used in General or GSM Channel Scanner modes.

MEASURE This key is not used in Channel Scanner mode.

When the instrument is in GSM Channel Scanner Mode, a Measure


key is used as below.

MEASURE ON/OFF: Turns the measurements on or off.

MEASURE SETUP This key is not used in Genera or GSM Channel Scanner modes.
CH
5

Chapter 5
5-6 CHANNEL SCANNER

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW
1 5
(GENERAL
CHANNEL
2
SCANNER )
3 6

9
4

10

CH
Figure 12 – Overview of General Channel Scanner Display
5

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale


information
② Input Attenuation Information
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Number of Averaging
④ RF In Loss Setting Information
⑤ Set scan mode
⑥ Changes the Start frequency in the channel scanner
⑦ Set frequency step increment size
⑧ Set bandwidth to be measured
⑨ Using this key, the channel band can be selected without setting
Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom channel
bands will pop-up to select the proper band
⑩ Selects the unit of either the Frequency or the Channel. When the
“Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step

Chapter 5
CHANNEL SCANNER 5-7

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW (GSM
CHANNEL
SCANNER)

Figure 13 – Overview of GSM Channel Scanner Display CH


5
① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale
information
② Input Attenuation Information
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Frequency Setting Information (Center/Start/Stop)
④ RF In Loss Setting Information
⑤ Set scan mode
⑥ Changes the Start frequency in the channel scanner
⑦ Set the number of channels to be scanned
⑧ Using this key, the channel band can be selected without setting
Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom channel
bands will pop-up to select the proper band
⑨ Selects the unit of either the Frequency or the Channel. When the
“Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step

Chapter 5
5-8 CHANNEL SCANNER

CABLE CONNECTION

The maximum power for the RF-In port is 30dBm (1 Watt). If


! the input signal level to be measured is greater than 30dBm,
use a High Power Attenuator to prevent damage when you
directly connect the signal to the instrument. Or, connect a signal from the
coupling port of a directional coupler.

Direct Connection

CH
5

Figure 14 – PA Output Port and RF In Port Connection

To
Indirect Connection Antenna

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
OUT
Directional IN or BTS
Coupler LPA
-50 dB

Figure 15 – Monitor Port and RF In Port Connection

Chapter 5
CHANNEL SCANNER 5-9

MAKING MEASUREMENTS

The key measurement parameters of a channel scanner are:

 General Channel Scanner


 GSM Channel Scanner

The general channel scanner can measure up to 20 channels in GSM,


CDMA or WCDMA networks. Using existing format-based or custom
parameters, the user will be able to easily verify improper multi-channel
power levels.

CH
The GSM channel scanner has the function to display channel power and
related information up to 128 GSM down link signals. This channel 5
scanner can quickly identifies improper power levels that affect network
performance; this can be done either over the air or directly connected to
the cell site.

Chapter 5
5-10 CHANNEL SCANNER

GENERAL Step Description


CHANNEL Mode Select General Channel Scanner
SCANNER [Channel Scanner] mode

Freq/Chan Set Frequency

[Start]

{Enter value}

[Step size] Set frequency step increment size

{Enter value}

[Integ. BW] Set bandwidth to be measured

{Enter value}

[CS Unit] Set channel scanner unit to be

CH <Freq/Chan> displayed

Table 18 – General Channel Scanner


5

GSM CHANNEL Before using GSM Channel Scanner, the instrument must be in GSM
SCANNER Analyzer mode. The following procedure sets the GSM Channel Scanner
mode:

Step Description

Mode Move to GSM Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM/EDGE]

[Channel Scanner] Select GSM Channel Scanner

Freq/Chan Set start frequency

[Start Freq]

{Enter Value}

[Num of CHs]

{Enter Value} Set number of channels to be

scanned

[Unit] Change the unit

<Freq/Chan>

[Measure] Starts measurement

<On/Off>

Table 19 – GSM Channel Scanner

Chapter 5
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-1

6.0 CDMA TX ANALYZER

In this chapter
CDMA Analyzer Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 6-2
Concept of Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................ 6-3
Modulation Accuracy (Rho) Measurement Concepts ............................................................................ 6-3
Code Domain Measurement Concepts ................................................................................................. 6-4
Spurious Emission Measurement Concepts ......................................................................................... 6-5
ACPR Measurement Concepts ............................................................................................................. 6-5
Using CDMA Analyzer .................................................................................................................................. 6-6
How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 6-7
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 6-7
CH
Amplitude.............................................................................................................................................. 6-7
Trace/Display ........................................................................................................................................ 6-9
BW/AVG...............................................................................................................................................6-11
6
Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 6-12
Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 6-13
Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 6-13
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 6-14
Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 6-15
Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 6-16
Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................................ 6-16
External Clock Setting ................................................................................................................ 6-17
Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................................ 6-18
Channel Power Procedure.......................................................................................................... 6-19
Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................... 6-19
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................... 6-20
Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................................. 6-20
Occupied Bandwidth Screen....................................................................................................... 6-21
ACPR Measurement ........................................................................................................................... 6-22
ACPR Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 6-23
ACPR Screen ............................................................................................................................. 6-24
Spurious Emission Mask (SEM) Measurement................................................................................... 6-25
SEM Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 6-25
SEM Screen................................................................................................................................ 6-26
CDMA Code Domain Measurement.................................................................................................... 6-27
CDP Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................... 6-27
CDP Screen ................................................................................................................................ 6-28
cdma2000 CDP Measurement Items .......................................................................................... 6-29
CDMA OTA Measurement................................................................................................................... 6-30
OTA Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................... 6-30
OTA Measurement Screen.......................................................................................................... 6-31

Chapter 6
6-2 CDMA TX ANALYZER

CDMA ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

cdma2000 is one of the proposals for the IMT-2000 requirements for a 3G


global wireless communications system. The 3GPP2 is implementing this
wideband CDMA system as a derivative of the IS-95-B CDMA system,
also known as cdmaOne. The 3GPP2 organizational partners are ARIB,
TTC, TIA, and TTA.1

CdmaOne uses dual BPSK (Binary Phase-Shifting Key) for the forward
link and OQPSK (Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) for the reverse
link.

cdma2000 uses QPSK (Quadrature phase-shift keying) modulation for the


forward link and QPSK modulation with HPSK spreading for the reverse
link. Both forward and reverse links may have several channels, and
CH
individual characteristics for each channel. The chip rate depends on the
6 mode selected.

This section provides the basic concepts of CDMA (cdmaOne &


cdma2000) communication systems, and explains how the measurements
are performed by the instrument.

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-3

CONCEPT OF The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless
CHANNEL POWER industry to measure the total transmitted power of a radio within a defined
MEASUREMENT frequency channel.

The Channel Power measurement reports the total transmitted power


within the channel bandwidth (1.23MHz for cdmaOne). The measurement
acquires a number of points representing the input signal in the time
domain. It transforms this information into the frequency domain using
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) and then calculates the channel power. The
effective resolution bandwidth of the frequency domain trace is
proportional to the number of points acquired for the FFT.

To improve repeatability, either the number of averages or the number of


data points can be increased with a longer time record. The channel
power trace is shown in the graph window, while the absolute channel
CH
power in dBm and the mean power spectral density in dBm/Hz are shown
in the text window. 6

MODULATION Rho is one of the key modulation quality metrics, along with EVM (error
ACCURACY (RHO) vector modulation) and CDP (code domain power).
MEASUREMENT
CONCEPTS Rho is the ratio between the correlated power in a single coded channel
and the total signal power. This is a simplified case of code domain power
since this measurement is made on a single coded channel.

This measurement takes into account all possible error factors in the
entire transmission chain including baseband filtering, I/Q modulation
anomalies, filter amplitude, phase variation, and power amplifier distortion.
This provides an overall indication of the transmitter's performance level.

Chapter 6
6-4 CDMA TX ANALYZER

CODE DOMAIN The code domain measurement displays the power for each of the 64
MEASUREMENT Walsh channels, relative to the total power inside a 1.23 MHz bandwidth
CONCEPTS centered at the Center Frequency. Each Walsh channel level is displayed
as an individual vertical bar. Because this is a relative measurement, the
unit of measure is dB (not dBm or watts). This allows a comparison of
signal levels between the Pilot, Sync, Paging, and Traffic channels.

Rho: Rho is one of the key modulation quality metrics, along with EVM
and code domain power. Rho is the ratio between the correlated power in
a single coded channel and the total signal power. This is a simplified case
of code domain power since this measurement is made on a single coded
channel.

Time Offset: Time Offset indicates how well the transmitter’s signal is
time-aligned to the system time. The displayed value takes into account
CH
the PN Sequence offset Index of the transmitter.
6
Frequency Error: Frequency Error is the frequency difference between
the transmitter’s actual center frequency and the frequency (or channel)
entered.

Pilot Power: It is the relative power of the pilot channel (Walsh code 0)
with respect to the carrier’s power.

Sync Power: It is the relative power of the sync channel (Walsh code 32)
with respect to the carrier’s power.

Paging Power: Is the relative power of the paging channel (Walsh code 1)
with respect to the carrier’s power.

Average Traffic Channel Power: It is the average relative power of the


active traffic channels with respect to the carrier power. Traffic channels
are defined as all of the Walsh codes except Walsh 0,1and 32. A traffic
channel is active if its coding power is greater than the active threshold
parameter selected.

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-5

SPURIOUS Measures the spurious emissions in the transmitter’s band relative to the
EMISSION selected channel power. The transmitter’s band spectrum is measured in
MEASUREMENT several frequency segments using resolution bandwidths as specified by
CONCEPTS the standard. The channel power (integrated power in a 1.23 MHz
bandwidth) is measured first, and then it is used as a reference for the
measurement limit levels. The spectrum, centered around the carrier as
well as above and below the carrier, is then measured. For each spectrum
segment, the measurement looks for the spectrum peak closest to the limit
and reports it as the Worst Spur.

ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR), as it applies to cdmaOne, is the


MEASUREMENT power contained in a specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the
CONCEPTS total carrier power. It may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral
density between the carrier and the specified offset frequency band.

CH
As a composite measurement of out-of-channel emissions, ACPR
combines both in-band and out-of-band specifications to provide useful 6
figures-of-merit for spectral growth and emissions produced by
components and circuit blocks without the need to perform a full spectrum
emissions mask measurement.

This ACPR measurement analyzes the total power levels within the
defined carrier bandwidth and at given frequency offset on both sides of
the carrier frequency.

It uses an integration bandwidth method that performs a time domain data


acquisition and applies FFT to get a frequency domain trace. In this
measurement, the channel integration bandwidth is analyzed using the
automatically defined resolution bandwidth (RBW), which is much
narrower than the channel bandwidth. The measurement computes an
average power of the channel over a specified number of data acquisitions,
automatically compensating for resolution bandwidth and noise bandwidth.

Chapter 6
6-6 CDMA TX ANALYZER

USING CDMA ANALYZER

This section provides a procedure for the transmission analysis function to


test the transmitter’s performance of CDMA (cdmaOne & cdma2000)
systems.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis tools for CDMA system.

 Channel Power
 Occupied Bandwidth
 Spurious Emission
 ACPR
 Demodulator (Code Domain Analyzer)
 OTA
 Auto Measure
CH
6

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-7

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides guidance on the use of the instrument’s keys in


CDMA Tx Analyzer mode.
Freq/Chan
FREQ/CHAN Sets the Frequency by selecting standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the


spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,
the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is
completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.
When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in
predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured
selecting the CF Step Menu.

CH
CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be
entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data 6
Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value.
When using the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased
by 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected
without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom
channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When


the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.
Amplitude
AMPLITUDE When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,
and ACPR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the
minimum and maximum values off the Y-axis of the graph for optimum
display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,
the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values
with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

Chapter 6
6-8 CDMA TX ANALYZER

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets Y-axis maximum range when using the


spectrum analyzer or Tx Analyzer functions.

Step Description

Amplitude Select from front Hard Key

[Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

<Enter values> Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

Knob Step= 10dB

Table 20 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

CH AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the

6 reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended


to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level


changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

! allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user
(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input
attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be
displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input
attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to
an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power

! Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the


JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the
measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input
signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again
and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-9

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an Amplitude key is


used as below.

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended
to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.
CH

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level 6


changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

REFERENCE: Selects the Relative or Absolute value to be displayed.


REL: The code domain power is measured relative to channel power.
ABS: The code domain power is measured absolute to channel power.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

TRACE/DISPLAY This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,


measurement mode, a Trace/Display key is used as below.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select
screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are
assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

Chapter 6
6-10 CDMA TX ANALYZER

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press
the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with
View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores
hidden traces and information on the window.

 M: Max Hold
 m: Min Hold
 C: Captured Trace
 W: Current Trace
 L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned


trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.
CH
6 MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger
trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller
trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared
traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces
cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace
settings.

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-11

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Trace/Display key is


used as below.

WALSH CODE: Selects the Walsh Code to be displayed between 64 or


128.

CODOGRAM: Selects codogram view.

CODOGRAM OFF/ON: Turns Codogram view On/Off.

RESET/RESTART: Reset current measurement and restart.

TIME INTERVAL: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be


demodulated.

CH
AUTO SAVE: Saves the measurement data automatically to
external memory, USB. 6

TIME CURSOR: Sets Time Cursor on the measurement.

BW/AVG AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the


trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an BW/AVG key is


used as below.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

Chapter 6
6-12 CDMA TX ANALYZER

MARKER This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,


Demodulator measurement mode, a Marker key is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six
Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,
and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on
any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y
coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to
the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be


changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active
markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s
CH
number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker
6 View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In


the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions
when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has
been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:
Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the
reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between
two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,


1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a


Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a
Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes
the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X
and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-13

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are
redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a
measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window


appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the
marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

PEAK SEARCH This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,


Demodulator measurement mode, a Peak Search key is used as
below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the


CH
highest peak of the Trace.
6
PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its
current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its
current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of


the trace each time the trace is updated.

MEASURE When the instrument is in Tx Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to


select measurement menu listed below.

 Channel Power Measurement


 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement
 SEM Measurement
 ACPR Measurement
 Demodulator Measurement
 OTA Measurement
 Auto Measure

Chapter 6
6-14 CDMA TX ANALYZER

MEASURE SETUP This key is not used when the instrument is in Channel Power,
Occupied Bandwidth, SEM, and ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup key


is used as below.

THRESHOLD: Indicates which codes are considered active.

Q PAGING CHANNEL: Q paging channel indicates the power of Quick


Page Walsh code 80.

CH
6

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-15

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW

Figure 16 – Overview of CDMA Tx Analyzer Display

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale


information CH
② Input Attenuation Information 6
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Number of Averaging
④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value
⑤ Span Setting Information
⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information
⑦ Trace Information
C: Captured, M: Max Hold, m: Min Hold
⑧ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key
⑨ Channel Power Measurement Key
⑩ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key
⑪ SEM Measurement Key
⑫ ACPR Measurement Key
⑬ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key

Chapter 6
6-16 CDMA TX ANALYZER

SETUP Setup frequency information in advance is necessary to use the Tx


Analysis function. Analysis for Multi-FA can be done conveniently with The
JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-FA.

Frequency Step Description

Setup Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss
was measured

Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode


[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency


[Start Freq]
[Stop Freq]
[Center Freq]
or
[Center Freq]
[Span]
CH or
[Unit]
6 <Freq/Chan> Select Chan
[Channel Standard] Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down
Arrow key
<Select>
Amplitude Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale
[Reference Level]
[Scale Division]
[Auto Atten] To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look
for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step
Marker Set Marker
[Marker Select] Select M1 ~ M6
[Marker View] On/Off
[Marker Type] Normal/Delta
[Marker Table] When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative
coordinates of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table
Type frequency to set Marker
[Marker Edit]
[Marker ]
<Marker  CF> Set current Marker frequency to center frequency
<Marker  Start> Set current Marker frequency to start frequency
<Marker  Stop> Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency
BW/AVG Set RBW/VBW and Average
[RBW]
[VBW/RBW] Select RBW from screen key
1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003
[SPAN/VBW]
Table 21 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-17

External Clock To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurement results, The
Setting JD7105A and Base Station must be synchronized. When external clock is
not supplied, The JD7105A works with built-in internal High Accuracy Time
Base. However, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate value
if it is not synchronized with signal source. Therefore, it is highly
recommended to use the same reference clock as signal source. Sync
Mode can be changed in Setup.

Standards

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

Clock switching

(Input signal level CH


>-3dBm)
6
External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)

PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In Manual switching

(BNC)

External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Table 22 – External Clock Operating Standard

Figure 17 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

Chapter 6
6-18 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Ext Ref Clock


Port Name Signal Characteristics
Interface
Specification Even Sec Sync In PP2S TTL compatible

10msec

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

Table 23 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

CHANNEL POWER Channel Power measures the integrated strength of the wireless signal
MEASUREMENT within a defined bandwidth. It is the primary measurement item in the
CDMA system. Channel power measurement of cdmaOne channel is
made by integrating the spectral density within 1.23MHz integration
bandwidth using the spectrum data from FFT. Since the JD7105A utilizes
CH
pre-defined data points and RBW to perform the measurement, some
6 parameters cannot be changed.

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-19

Channel Power
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]
CH
[CDMA] Select CDMA

[Channel Power] Select Channel Power Measurement 6


Table 24 – cdma2000 Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Channel Power
Screen

Figure 18 – cdma2000 Channel Power Measurement Screen

Chapter 6
6-20 CDMA TX ANALYZER

OCCUPIED Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is


BANDWIDTH defined as the bandwidth which includes 99% of the transmitted power
MEASUREMENT among total transmitted power.

Occupied Bandwidth
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX

CH
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP

6
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[CDMA] Select CDMA

[Occupied Bandwidth] Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

Table 25 – cdma2000 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-21

Occupied Bandwidth The default span for cdma2000 occupied bandwidth measurement is set
Screen at the factory to 3.23MHz. Users can change the span using the
Freq/Chan key.

 Total Power: Total power contained in the specified span.


 Occupied Power: 99% of the total power.
 Occupied Freq: Frequency bandwidth containing 99% of the total
power.

CH
6

Figure 19 – cdma2000 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

Chapter 6
6-22 CDMA TX ANALYZER

ACPR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR) is defined as the ratio of the
MEASUREMENT average power in the adjacent frequency channel (or offset) to the
average power in the transmitted frequency channel. It may also be
expressed as the ratio of the integrated signal power in the adjacent
channel to the integrated signal power in the main channel, which is
defined as ACLR (Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio).

To maintain a quality call by avoiding channel interference, it is important


to measure and reduce any adjacent channel leakage power transmitted
from a mobile phone. The following is a list of factors that degrade the
ACPR characteristics.

 Fault occurs in the control of the DC power supplied to power


amplifier (PA), RF power control of PA, or I,Q control in the Base
Station.
CH
 Fault in PA gain control caused by increased distortion.
6  Increased harmonics due to the degradation of PA’s linearity.

The increase in induced power to adjacent channel caused by degraded


ACPR characteristics increases the noise in the in-band of the adjacent
channel, which results in a call quality degradation.

In-band noise in CDMA system not only degrades communication quality,


but also becomes a major factor of reduction of call capacity.

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-23

ACPR Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[CDMA] Select CDMA


CH
[ACPR] Select ACPR Measurement

Table 26 – cdma2000 ACPR Measurement Procedure 6

Chapter 6
6-24 CDMA TX ANALYZER

ACPR Screen

Figure 20 – cdma2000 ACPR Measurement Screen


CH
6  Total Power: Channel power measurement value
 Offset Frequency (3GPP recommendation):
 For Cellular bands: 750KHz, 1.98MHz, 3.125MHz
 For PCS bands: 885KHz, 1.98MHz, 3.125MHz
 Integ BW: Frequency band to measure power around the center of
offset frequency
 Lower: Power value at the point of frequency offset lower than the
center frequency
 dBc: Channel Power – Power contained in the integrated
bandwidth of the offset point (relative)
 dBm: Channel Power – Power contained in integrated
bandwidth of the offset point (absolute)
 Upper: Power value at the point of frequency offset, higher than the
center frequency
 dBc: Channel Power – Power contained in the integrated
bandwidth of the offset point (relative)
 dBm: Channel Power – Power contained in integrated
bandwidth of the offset point (absolute)

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-25

SPURIOUS Spurious Emission has the commonality with ACPR measurement that it
EMISSION MASK measures the interference of adjacent channels. It measures the power
(SEM) ratio between in-band and adjacent channels. Emission Measurement
MEASUREMENT differs from ACPR measurement in that it sets the mask on entire TX band
at the carrier center frequency and measures if the power within a defined
BW of adjacent channel exceeds the masked limit with Channel Power at
1.23MHz as the reference.

SEM Procedure
Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX
! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
RF In RF Out
! CAUTION
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
CH
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE

6
External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[CDMA] Select CDMA

[SEM] Select SEM Measurement

Table 27 – cdma2000 Emission Measurement Procedure

Chapter 6
6-26 CDMA TX ANALYZER

SEM Screen

Figure 21 – cdma2000 Emission Measurement Screen


CH
6
 Total Power: Channel power measurement value.
 Lower Peak: The absolute value of the highest peak at the band of
frequency offset lower than the center frequency.
 Upper Peak: The absolute value of the highest peak at the band of
frequency offset higher than the center frequency.

Marker’s position is defined by the Total Power Reference


measured. If peak values exceed the mask during the
measurement, then a “FAIL” message will be displayed on the upper
screen.

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-27

CDMA CODE The code domain measurement displays the power for each of the 64
DOMAIN Walsh channels relative to the total power inside a 1.23 MHz bandwidth
MEASUREMENT centered at the Center Frequency. Each Walsh channel level is displayed
as an individual vertical bar. Because this is a relative measurement, the
unit of measure is dB (not dBm or watts). This allows a comparison of
signal levels between the Pilot, Sync, Paging, and Traffic channels.

CDP Measurement
Procedure
Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC

CH
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out

6
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[TxAnalyzer]

[CDMA] Select CDMA

[Demodulator] Select Demodulator Measurement

Measure Setup Set Internal Parameters

[PN Offset]

{Auto}/{Manual}

[PN Inc]

[Threshold]

{Auto}/{Manual}

[Limit]

{On}/{Off}

Table 28 – cdma2000 CDP Measurement Procedure

Chapter 6
6-28 CDMA TX ANALYZER

CDP Procedure  Active channel threshold level is an advanced setting that can be set
(cont’d) to indicate which coded channels are considered active. The default
setting is -27dB.
 On the CDP measurement screen, information on the CH# among the
configured CH’s is displayed on the measurement screen. CH# can
be changed with the arrow keys. If there is an empty CH in between,
no CDP measurement result is shown and the message CDP
measurement is under progress will be shown, in this case, press an
arrow key once to stop the CDP measurement for empty CH and
moves to the next (or prior) CH.

Input of the code channel number using numeric keys after


selecting Marker-Marker Channel moves the marker to the
corresponding channel. The code channel number, relative value
(dB) and absolute value (dBm) of the marker’s position are displayed on
CH
the upper right corner of the display.
6

CDP Screen

Figure 22 – cdma2000 CDP Measurement Screen

In the above screen, green is for “Pilot”, red for “Paging” and blue for
“Sync” channels.

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-29

cdma2000 CDP  Ec/Io


Measurement Items  Pilot Channel Power(dBm)/Channel Power (dBm)
 Sync Walsh Channel Power
 Sync Channel Power(dBm)/Channel Power (dBm)
 Paging Walsh Channel Power
 Paging Channel Power(dBm)/Channel Power (dBm)
 Traffic Walsh Channel Level
 Traffic Channel Power(dBm)/Channel Power(dBm)
 Frequency Error
 Frequency difference between the center frequency of the
transmitter’s (BTS) and the frequency entered
 Time offset
 Time Offset compares the PN offset timing with the overall system
time. This measurement checks the start of PN offset in comparison
to either the GPS signal or the Even Second clock signal
CH
 Waveform Quality (Rho)
 Rho = Correlated Power / Channel Power 6
 Rho measures the modulation quality for a CDMA transmitter along
with EVM and Walsh Channel Power. It includes all errors occurred
along the transmitter chain such as base band filtering, abnormality of
I/Q modulator and distortion in power amplifier. A perfect Rho value is
1.0 indicating that all of the power is being transmitted correctly
 Max Active
 The highest value of active channel among Walsh code channels
except W64, W164, and W3264
 Active Set: Threshold Level to discriminate Active Channel and
Inactive Channel (Factory Set: -27dB)
 Average Active
 ∑ Traffic Channel Power / # of Traffic Channels
 Max Inactive
 Highest level among Inactive channels
 Active Set: Threshold Level to discriminate Active Channel and
Inactive Channel (Factory Set: -27dB)
 Average Inactive
 ∑ Uncorrelated Walsh Channel Power/ # of Inactive Channels
 Pilot Power (dBm)
 Incoming RF Channel Power + Ec/Io

Chapter 6
6-30 CDMA TX ANALYZER

CDMA OTA The Base Station Analyzer provides OTA - Over The Air measurements for
MEASUREMENT a quick performance characterization of the base station. This function is
especially useful in testing cell sites which are not easily accessible or
physical connection is not available.

The following is the measurement procedure of over the air measurement.


Note that the instrument must have access to the reference frequency
from the GPS receiver to get more accurate measurement results.

OTA Measurement
Procedure
Menu Description

Connect Omni/Directional RF Antenna to the JD7105A RF In port.

Connect GPS Antenna to the JD7105AGPS port.

CH
Modulated signal
(CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA)

RF Antenna GPS Antenna


(Omni or Directional)

BTS

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[TxAnalyzer]

[CDMA] Select CDMA

[OTA] Select OTA Measurement

Measure Setup Set Internal Measurement Parameters

{Threshold}

{Auto}/{Manual}

{Quick Page}

{On}/{Off}

{Limits}

{On}/{Off}

Table 29 – CDMA OTA Measurement Procedure

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-31

OTA Measurement
Screen

Figure 23 – CDMA OTA Measurement Screen CH


6
 PN Scanner
Each access network sector has a unique PN offset. You can use
the PN Scanner to identify all active PNs in the area.

 Multi-path Profile
Multipath profile indicates the amount of power of the dominant pilot
signal that is dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to
multipath echoes (expressed in dB). Ideally, this value should be
very small. Multipath profile is the result of portions of the original
broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna out of phase. This
can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects, such as
buildings, or being refracted through the atmosphere differently from
the main signal.

Note that the Multipath Profile is only valid for Over the Air
measurements. It does not apply to Transmitter measurements.

 Code Domain
Channels with high correlation factors are determined to be active
channels and are indicated as such on the display. Once the
channels are decoded, the analyzer determines the power in each
channel relative to the total signal power.

Chapter 6
6-32 CDMA TX ANALYZER

This measurement helps to verify that each code channel is operating


at its proper level and helps to identify problems throughout the
transmitter design from the coding to the RF section. System
imperfections, such as amplifier non-linearity, will present themselves
as an undesired distribution of power in the code domain.

 Channel Power (dBm)


The channel power measurement measures the channel power within
a specified bandwidth (default of 1.23 MHz).

 Pilot Power (dBm)


Incoming RF Channel Power + Ec/Io.
Ec/Io = Pilot Channel Power/Channel Power

 Waveform Quality (rho)


CH
Measure the correlated power to total power. The rho limit for CDMA
6 base stations as specified in the TIA IS-97 document is 0.912,
indicating that 91.2% of the correlated pilot power is contained in the
total transmission power.

Note that waveform quality, rho might be less than 0.912 when over
the air measurement due to an air-interface.

 PN Offset
It is a “short code” sequence that provides a unique identifier for each
sector of each cell site. The PN Offsets are applied to the I and Q
signals before modulation. PN Offsets are offset in time by 52.08μs
and they repeat every 26.666ms. This yields 512 unique short code
sequences (0-511). The access terminal needs the PN Offset to
decode information in the Pilot and MAC channels, which are
transmitted by the access network.

 Frequency Offset
To ensure that each CDMA transmitter is on its frequency and not
interfering with other CDMA channels, the standards specify very tight
frequency error performance, known as frequency tolerance. In the
PCS bands, the specification is ±0.05 parts per million, which
translates to only ±99Hz at a carrier frequency of 1980 MHz. In the
cellular bands, a CDMA transmitter must be within about 40Hz of

Chapter 6
CDMA TX ANALYZER 6-33

absolute frequency (±0.05 ppm at a carrier frequency of 800 MHz).

To accurately measure the frequency, the test equipment must have


access to the reference frequency from the GPS receiver.

 Time Offset
Each sector of each base station site operates on the same frequency
channel, and is distinguished from the others by a “PN offset”
sequence in the CDMA system. The PN offsets are offset in time by
52.08μs (64 chips) each and they repeat every 26.666ms (32768
chips). This yields 512 PN codes (32768/64), where each has a
unique offset.

The time offset measurement compares the time of the repeat to the
offset from the even-second clock (base station, or GPS time). The
CH
CDMA standards specify a maximum offset of 10 microseconds, but 3
microseconds is a recommended maximum. If the time offset of the 6
target cell is too far from that of the current site, the handoff will not
happen.

This is the only transmitter test that requires the even-second clock
signal from the base station. Other transmitter tests can be
performed without this connection.

Chapter 6
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-1

7.0 EVDO TX ANALYZER

In this chapter
EVDO Analyzer Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
1xEV-DO Forward Link ......................................................................................................................... 7-3
Frame Structure .................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Channel Power Measurement Concepts .............................................................................................. 7-4
Code Domain (Forward Link) Measurement Concepts ......................................................................... 7-4
Modulation Accuracy (Waveform Quality) Measurement Concepts ...................................................... 7-5
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Concepts ...................................................................................... 7-6
Spurious Emissions and Adjacent Channel Power Measurement Concepts ........................................ 7-6
Using EVDO Analyzer .................................................................................................................................. 7-8
How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 7-9
Amplitude.............................................................................................................................................. 7-9
Trace/Display .......................................................................................................................................7-11
BW/AVG.............................................................................................................................................. 7-13
Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 7-14
Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 7-15 CH
Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 7-16
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 7-16
Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 7-17
7
Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 7-18
Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................................ 7-18
External Clock Setting ................................................................................................................ 7-19
Ext Ref Clock Interface Specification .......................................................................................... 7-20
Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................................ 7-20
Channel Power Procedure.......................................................................................................... 7-21
Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................... 7-21
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................... 7-22
Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................................. 7-22
Occupied Bandwidth Screen....................................................................................................... 7-23
Spurious Emission Mask Measurement .............................................................................................. 7-24
SEM Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 7-24
SEM Screen................................................................................................................................ 7-24
ACPR Measurement ........................................................................................................................... 7-25
ACPR Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 7-25
ACPR Screen ............................................................................................................................. 7-25
Code Domain Power........................................................................................................................... 7-26
EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement ........................................................................................... 7-26
EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement .......................................................................................... 7-26
EV-DO Traffic Channel Measurement ......................................................................................... 7-26
CDP Procedure........................................................................................................................... 7-27
EV-DO Pilot Channel CDP .......................................................................................................... 7-28
EV-DO Pilot Channel Measurement Parameters ........................................................................ 7-29
EV-DO MAC Channel CDP ......................................................................................................... 7-29
EV-DO MAC Channel CDP Screen ............................................................................................ 7-30
EV-DO MAC Channel Measurement Parameters ....................................................................... 7-30
Required Specification for EV-DO MAC Channel........................................................................ 7-31
EV-DO Data Channel Measurement ........................................................................................... 7-31
EV-DO Data Channel Measurement Screen............................................................................... 7-32
EV-DO Traffic CDP Measurement Parameters ........................................................................... 7-32
Required Specification for EV-DO Traffic Channel ...................................................................... 7-33

Chapter 7
7-2 CDMA TX ANALYZER

EVDO ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

1xEV-DO is the name applied to the first single-channel evolution (1xEV)


of 3GPP2 communications system optimized for data only (-DO). As 1xEV-
DO has evolved from cdma2000 (voice) systems and has structural
similarity with cdma2000, this section will describe the differences
between 1xEV-DO and cdma2000.

1xEV-DO uses what it is known as High Rate Packet Data, using the
same final spread rate of 1.2288 Mcps as does cdma2000 SR1. It also
uses the same digital filter to reduce the final modulation bandwidth; as a
result, 1xEV-DO is spectrally compatible with cdma2000 SR1. Both 1xEV-
DO and cdma2000 SR1 can utilize the same amplifiers, combiners, and
antennas, which reduces the implementation cost of 1xEV-DO.

Although 1xEV-DO is compatible with much of the existing infrastructure of


cdma2000, the two systems cannot occupy the same channel
simultaneously. Each 1xEV-DO channel requires a paired 1.25 MHz clear
CH
channel; therefore it cannot be overlaid with cdma2000 channels.
7
1xEV-DO requires a dedicated CDMA channel (1.25 MHz) for the packet-
data system. This channel cannot carry any voice. The system uses the
exact chip rate and emission filters that are used in cdma2000 and IS-95
CDMA systems, so the new system is spectrally identical to legacy
systems.

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-3

1XEV-DO 1xEV-DO relies on GPS for intercell synchronization, in the same manner
FORWARD LINK as cdma2000. The 1xEV-DO system is well suited for data transmission in
the forward link as it is optimized for high speed packet data
communication. When compared to the recent IS95-B design in
cdma2000, 1xEV-DO shows a 6 times improvement in the overall network
data rate. The largest contribution to overall increased data throughput is
the ability of 1xEV-DO to negotiate for increased data rate for individual
users or mobiles as only one user is served at a time. The forward link is
always transmitted in its full power using a rate control scheme instead of
power control scheme, as in cdma2000.

FRAME Forward link of 1xEV-DO is a frame structure and each frame consists of
STRUCTURE 16 slots. The frame period for 1xEV-DO is 26.667ms, which is also the
period of one pilot channel. Each frame is divided into 16 slots of 1.666ms.
1xEV-DO uses CDMA modulation scheme, but unlike its previous systems
the Pilot, MAC (Media Access Control), and Data (Traffic) Channel are not
transmitted simultaneously; instead they are transmitted in TDM (Time
Division Multiplex). The following figure shows the frame structure of EV-
DO and TDM structure of each channel at one time slot. The slot with the CH
loaded data in traffic channel is called Active Slot and the slot with no data 7
in traffic channel is called Idle Slot.

Frame
Slot Slot Slot
0 7 15

Slot 1024 chips = half slot


Active Slot
1024 chips = half slot

MAC MAC MAC MAC


Pilot Data Pilot Data
64 64 64 64
96 chips 400 chips 96 chips 400 chips
chips chips chips chips

Preamble: 64 to 1024 chips

Idle Slot
MAC MAC MAC MAC
Pilot Pilot
64 64 64 64
96 chips 96 chips
chips chips chips chips

1.666ms

Figure 24 – 1xEv-DO Forward Link Structure

Chapter 7
7-4 CDMA TX ANALYZER

CHANNEL POWER The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless
MEASUREMENT industry to measure the total transmitted power of a radio within a defined
CONCEPTS frequency channel. This procedure measures the total power within the
defined channel for 1xEV-DO. This measurement is applied the design,
characterization, evaluation, and verification of transmitters and their
components, or devices, for base stations and mobile stations.

For 1xEV-DO, depending on the installed measurement personality


revision and measurement selection, the test device is fixed to a base
station.

The Channel Power measurement reports the total transmitted power


within the channel bandwidth, 1.23 MHz for the 1xEV-DO mode. The
measurement acquires a number of points representing the input signal in
the time domain. It transforms this information into the frequency domain
using FFT and then calculates the channel power.

CODE DOMAIN Since the code domain measurements de-spread and descramble the
CH
(FORWARD LINK) 1xEV-DO signal into its physical channels, the number of active channels
7 MEASUREMENT of various symbol rates (which are denoted by widths) can be observed.
CONCEPTS The width of the channel is inversely proportional to the Walsh code length
in number of bits. In the code domain, there is a fixed amount of code
space for a given chip rate. Therefore, by using the different Walsh codes,
the system can dynamically allocate the code spaces for high speed data
users.

This code domain power composite view provides information about the
in-channel characteristics of the 1xEV-DO signal. It directly informs the
user of the active channels with their individual channel powers. The
composite view also shows which data rates are active and the
corresponding amount of code space used. The following are conditions
under which a general unlock can occur: the Pilot signal is too low in
power or no Pilot signal is available, the frequency error is too large, or a
frequency inversion is present.

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-5

When the level of the code domain noise floor is too high, relative to a
reference or an expected level, one of the possible causes might be due
to CW interference, like local oscillator feed through or spurs. I/Q
modulation impairments can be another source of this uncorrelated noise.
The I/Q demodulation measurements can reveal errors such as I/Q gain
imbalance or I/Q Quadrature error.

This procedure measures the power levels of the spread channels in


composite RF channels.

The code domain measurement displays the power for each of the spread
channels, relative to the total power within the 1.230 MHz channel
bandwidth centered at the center frequency. Each spread channel level is
displayed as an individual vertical bar with a different width determined by
a spread rate. Because this is a relative measurement, the unit of
measure is dB (not dBm or watts). This allows a comparison of signal
levels between the Pilot, MAC, and Traffic channels.

MODULATION Rho is one of the key modulation quality metrics, along with EVM and CH
ACCURACY code domain power. Rho is the ratio of the correlated power in a single 7
(WAVEFORM coded channel to the total signal power. This is a simplified case of code
QUALITY) domain power since this measurement is made on a single coded channel.
MEASUREMENT This measurement takes into account all possible error mechanisms in the
CONCEPTS entire transmission chain including baseband filtering, I/Q modulation
anomalies, filter amplitude, phase nonlinearities, and power amplifier
distortion. This provides an overall indication of the performance level of
the transmitter.

In a digitally modulated signal, it is possible to predict what the ideal


magnitude and phase of the carrier should be at any time, based on the
transmitted data sequence. The transmitter’s modulated signal is
compared to an ideal signal vector. The difference between these two
vectors is sampled and processed using DSP. Rho values are in the range
of 0.000 to 1.000. A value of 1.000 indicates perfect correlation to the
reference (high modulation quality).

Chapter 7
7-6 CDMA TX ANALYZER

OCCUPIED Occupied bandwidth measurements express the percentage of the


BANDWIDTH transmitted power within a specified bandwidth. This percentage is
MEASUREMENT typically 99%.
CONCEPTS
The spectrum shape of a 1xEV-DO signal can give useful qualitative
insight into transmitter operation. Any distortion to the spectrum shape can
indicate problems of the transmitter’s performance.

The instrument uses digital signal processing (DSP) to sample the input
signal and convert it to the frequency domain. With the instrument tuned to
a fixed center frequency, samples are digitized at a high rate with DSP
hardware, and then converted to the frequency domain with FFT software.
The total power within the measured frequency span is integrated for its
100% of power. The frequencies of 0.5% of the total power are then
calculated to get 99.0% bandwidth.

SPURIOUS Spurious Emissions Mask (SEM) & Adjacent Channel Power (ACP)
EMISSIONS AND measurements include the in-band and out-of-band adjacent channel
CH
ADJACENT power and spurious emissions. ACP, as it applies to 1xEV-DO, is the
7 CHANNEL POWER power contained in a specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the
MEASUREMENT carrier frequency. It may also be expressed as power spectral density
CONCEPTS between the carrier and the specified offset frequency band.

As a composite measurement of out-of-channel emissions, Spurious


Emissions and ACP combines both in-band and out-of-band specifications
to provide useful values of figure-of-merit for spectral re-growth as well as
spurious emissions produced by nonlinear components and circuit blocks.

To maintain a quality data transmission and avoid adjacent channel


interference, it is necessary to measure and reduce the adjacent channel
power transmitted by an access network. The characteristics of adjacent
channel power are mainly determined by the transmitter design, in
particular the power amplifiers and the low-pass filters.

Adjacent channel power is defined by 1xEV-DO standard as the total


power within the bandwidth of ±15 kHz, with the filters edge at 750 kHz
offset from the carrier frequency.

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-7

Spurious Emissions This ACP measurement analyzes the total power levels within the defined
and Adjacent carrier bandwidth at given frequency offsets on both sides of the carrier's
Channel Power frequency. Also, the SEM measures spurious signal levels in given offsets
Measurement or region frequencies and relates them to the carrier power. These
Concepts (cont’d) measurements require the user to specify measurement bandwidths of the
carrier channel and each of the offset frequency pairs up to 5. Each pair
may be defined with unique measurement bandwidth.

A reference channel integration bandwidth method is used to measure the


carrier channel power, and offset or region power. When “ACP” is selected,
the adjacent channel power measurement is made with the optimized
region and limits settings. When “SEM” is selected, the conducted
spurious emissions measurements are made with the optimized parameter
settings. This integration bandwidth (IBW) method performs a data
acquisition. In this process, the reference channel integration bandwidth
(Meas. BW) is analyzed using the defined resolution bandwidth (Res. BW),
which is narrower than the channel bandwidth. The measurement
computes an average power of the channel, offset, or region over a
specified number of data acquisition, automatically compensating for CH
resolution bandwidth and noise bandwidth. 7

Chapter 7
7-8 CDMA TX ANALYZER

USING EVDO ANALYZER

This section describes the analysis function to test the proper transmitter
performance of EVDO systems.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis for 1xEV-DO system.

 Channel Power
 Occupied Bandwidth
 Spurious Emission
 ACPR
 Demodulator (Code Domain Analyzer)
 OTA
 Auto Measure

CH
7

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-9

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section provides the keys used in 1x EVDO Tx Analysis mode.


Freq/Chan
FREQ/CHAN Sets the Frequency by selecting standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the


spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,
the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is
completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.
When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in
predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured
selecting the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be


entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data
Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit input value. When using
the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased by 0.1MHz.
CH
CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected 7
without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom
channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When


the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.
Amplitude
AMPLITUDE When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,
and ACPR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the
minimum and maximum values off the Y-axis of the graph for optimum
display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,
the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values
with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

Chapter 7
7-10 CDMA TX ANALYZER

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using the
spectrum analyzer or Tx Analyzer functions.

Step Description

Amplitude Select from front Hard Key

[Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

<Enter values> Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

Knob Step= 10dB

Table 30 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended
to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.
CH
7 MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level
changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the
allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user
!
(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input
attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be
displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input
attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to
an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power


Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the
!
JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the
measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input
signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again
and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-11

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an Amplitude key is


used as below.

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended
to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level


changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed. CH
7
REFERENCE: Selects the relative or absolute value to be displayed.
REL: The code domain power is measured relative to channel power.
ABS: The code domain power is measured absolute to channel power.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

TRACE/DISPLAY This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,


measurement mode, a Trace/Display key is used as below.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select
screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are
assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

Chapter 7
7-12 CDMA TX ANALYZER

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press
the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with
View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores
hidden traces and information on the window.

 M: Max Hold
 m: Min Hold
 C: Captured Trace
 W: Current Trace
 L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned


trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger
CH
trace on the screen.
7
MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller
trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared
traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces
cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace
settings.

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-13

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Trace/Display key is


used as below.

MAC CDP: Selects between Mac Index or Walsh Code. Code Domain
power changes by selecting Max index (or Walsh code).

CODOGRAM: Selects codogram view.

CODOGRAM OFF/ON: Turns Codogram view On/Off.

RESET/RESTART: Reset current measurement and restart.

TIME INTERVAL: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be


demodulated.

AUTO SAVE: Saves the measurement data automatically to


external memory, USB.

TIME CURSOR: Sets Time Cursor on the measurement. CH


7
BW/AVG AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the
trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an BW/AVG key is


used as below.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

Chapter 7
7-14 CDMA TX ANALYZER

MARKER This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,


Demodulator measurement mode, a Marker key is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six
Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,
and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on
any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y
coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to
the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be


changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active
markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s
number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker
View On is selected.

CH
MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In
7 the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions
when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has
been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:
Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the
reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between
two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,


1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a


Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a
Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes
the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X
and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-15

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are
redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a
measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window


appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the
marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

PEAK SEARCH This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,


Demodulator measurement mode, a Peak Search key is used as
below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the


highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its
current position. CH
7
PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its
current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of


the trace each time the trace is updated.

Chapter 7
7-16 CDMA TX ANALYZER

MEASURE When the instrument is in Tx Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to


select measurement menu listed below.

 Channel Power Measurement


 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement
 SEM Measurement
 ACPR Measurement
 Demodulator Measurement
 OTA Measurement
 Auto Measure

MEASURE SETUP This key is not in used when the instrument is in Channel Power,
Occupied Bandwidth, SEM, and ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup key


is used as below.

THRESHOLD: Indicates which codes are considered active.


CH
7 CDP TYPE: CDP type parameter is used to specify whether you are
dispreading pilot, MAC64 and Data.

LIMITS ON/OFF: Enable or Disable Limits.

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-17

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW 1 8

9
2

3 10

4 11

5 12

6 13

Figure 25 – Overview of 1xEVDO Tx Analyzer Display

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale


information
② Input Attenuation Information
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Number of Averaging CH
④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value 7
⑤ Span Setting Information
⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information
⑦ Trace Information
C: Captured, M: Max Hold, m: Min Hold
⑧ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key
⑨ Channel Power Measurement Key
⑩ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key
⑪ SEM Measurement Key
⑫ ACPR Measurement Key
⑬ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key

Chapter 7
7-18 CDMA TX ANALYZER

SETUP Setup frequency information in advance is necessary to use Tx Analysis


function. Analysis for Multi-CH can be done conveniently with The
JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-CH.

Frequency Step Description

Setup Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss
was measured

Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode


[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency


[Start Freq]
[Stop Freq]
[Center Freq]
or
[Center Freq]
[Span]
or
[Unit]
<Freq/Chan> Select Chan
[Channel Standard] Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down
CH Arrow key
<Select>
7 Amplitude Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale
[Reference Level]
[Scale Division]
[Auto Atten] To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look
for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step
Marker Set Marker
[Marker Select] Select M1 ~ M6
[Marker View] On/Off
[Marker Type] Normal/Delta
[Marker Table] When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative
coordinates of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table
Type frequency to set Marker
[Marker Edit]
[Marker ]
<Marker  CF> Set current Marker frequency to center frequency
<Marker  Start> Set current Marker frequency to start frequency
<Marker  Stop> Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency
BW/AVG Set RBW/VBW and Average
[RBW]
[VBW/RBW] Select RBW from screen key
1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003
[SPAN/VBW]
Table 31 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-19

External Clock To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurements the JD7105A
Setting must be synchronized with the Base Station. When an external clock is not
supplied, the JD7105A works with a built-in internal high-accuracy time
base; however, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values,
therefore, it is highly recommended to use the same reference clock as
signal source. Sync Mode can be changed in the setup menu.
Standards

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

Clock switching

(Input signal level

>-3dBm)

External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)
CH
PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In Manual switching 7


(BNC)

External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Table 32 – External Clock Operating Standard

Figure 26 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

Chapter 7
7-20 CDMA TX ANALYZER

Ext Ref Clock Port Name Signal Characteristics


Interface
Even Sec Sync In PP2S TTL compatible
Specification
10msec

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

Table 33 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

CHANNEL POWER Channel Power measures the integrated strength of the wireless signal
MEASUREMENT within a defined bandwidth. It is the primary measurement in the CDMA
systems. Channel power measurement of cdmaOne channel is made by
integrating the spectral density within 1.23MHz integration bandwidth
using the spectrum data from FFT. Since the JD7105A utilizes pre-defined
data points and RBW to perform the measurement, some parameters
cannot be changed.

CH
7

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-21

Channel Power The following table shows connection and procedure for Channel Power
Procedure Measurement.

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[EVDO] Select EVDO

[Channel Power] Select Channel Power Measurement

Table 34 – EVDO Channel Power Measurement Procedure


CH
Channel Power 7
Screen

Figure 27 – EVDO Channel Power Measurement Screen

Chapter 7
7-22 CDMA TX ANALYZER

OCCUPIED Occupied Bandwidth measures the spectrum shape of the carrier. It is


BANDWIDTH defined as the bandwidth which includes 99% of the transmitted power
MEASUREMENT among total transmitted power.

Occupied Bandwidth
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

CH [Tx Analyzer]

[EVDO] Select EVDO


7
[Occupied Bandwidth] Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

Table 35 – EVDO Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-23

Occupied Bandwidth The factory default SPAN of EVDO occupied BW measurement is


Screen 3.23MHz. Users can change the SPAN using the Freq/Chan key,

Figure 28 – EVDO Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen


CH
7

Chapter 7
7-24 CDMA TX ANALYZER

SPURIOUS The following table shows connection and procedure for Spurious
EMISSION MASK Emission Mask Measurement.
MEASUREMENT

SEM Procedure
Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

CH [EVDO] Select EVDO

[SEM] Select SEM Measurement


7
Table 36 – EVDO Emission Measurement Procedure

SEM Screen

Figure 29 – EVDO Emission Measurement Screen

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-25

ACPR The following table shows connection and procedure for ACPR
MEASUREMENT Measurement.

ACPR Procedure
Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[EVDO] Select EVDO

[ACPR] Select ACPR Measurement


CH
Table 37 – EVDO ACPR Measurement Procedure
7

ACPR Screen

Figure 30 – EVDO ACPR Measurement Screen

Chapter 7
7-26 CDMA TX ANALYZER

CODE DOMAIN In 1xEV-DO the code channel is not superposed simultaneously with the
POWER transmission channels. As they are transmitted in TDM, only one channel
is transmitted at a time. Therefore, 1xEV-DO CDP measurement displays
each Walsh code power of each physical channel at a time. Also, as I-
channel and Q-channel transmit different code channel for Pilot Channel
and MAC channel, 1xEV-DO measurement displays each I/Q channels
separately unlike cdmaOne or cdma2000. 1xEV-DO CDP measures the
correlated power with Walsh code and the code channel power is
expressed in dB as it is normalized to the total signal power.

Code Domain error can occur due to wrong configuration of channel


elements consisting of each channel and/or network software, impaired
Base band, RF chain, faults in amplifiers, or I/Q gain imbalance.

EV-DO Pilot  Pilot Channel Power (dBm)


Channel  Waveform Quality
Measurement  Time Offset
 Frequency Offset
CH
7
Standard for UONC Level is not applied to Pilot Channel.

 MAC Channel Power (dBm)


EV-DO MAC
 I/Q channel Orthogonality (I/Q Impairment Test)
Channel
 UOCN < -27dB
Measurement
 Number of Existing RA Channel > 1 ea

 16 code power of traffic channel in active slot = 1/16 of the nominal


EV-DO Traffic
power, i.e., -12.04dB ± 0.5dB.
Channel
Measurement
In idle slot, traffic channel doesn’t conform to above standard
and shows irregular code level.

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-27

CDP Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[EVDO] Select EVDO

[Demodulator] Select Demodulator Measurement

Measure Setup Set Internal Parameters

[PN Offset] CH
[PN Inc]
7
[Threshold]

{Auto}/{Manual}

[CDP Type]

{MAC128}/{MAX64}/{Pilot}/{Data}

[Limit]

{On/Off}

Table 38 – 1xEV-DO CDP Measurement Procedure

Chapter 7
7-28 CDMA TX ANALYZER

CDP Procedure  Active Set Threshold is the reference to differentiate active from
(Cont’d) inactive channels and the default is -27dB.
 CDP Measurement shows which channel (CH) number is currently
displayed, which can be changed using the arrow keys. In case there
is an empty CH in-between, CDP measurement is not shown and the
message indicating the measurement is in progress is displayed
continuously. In this case, pressing the arrow keys will stop the
measurement for the empty CH and moves to the next (or previous)
CH.

EV-DO Pilot The Pilot Channel spreads in 32 Walsh Code and only the number “0” of
Channel CDP the I-channel carries the Pilot Code Channel and all the other code
channels are not used. There is no specific standard for Pilot Channel
CDP measurement, except the measurement to verify if the Pilot Code
Channel should be high enough to differentiate with the noise power of the
unoccupied channels.

CH
7

Figure 31 – 1xEV-DO Pilot CDP Measurement Result

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-29

EV-DO Pilot  Average Power: Average Power of Time Slot (dBm)


Channel  Pilot Power: Pilot Channel Power (dBm)
Measurement  I/Q Max Active: Peak value among Active channel level
Parameters  I/Q Average Active: Average value of Active channel level
 I/Q Max InActive: Peak value among In-Active channel level
 I/Q Avg InActive: Average value of In-Active channel level
 PN: PN number of the measured EV-DO signal
 Frequency Error: Measurement of the carrier’s center frequency
accuracy transmitted from the BTS. The deviation from the measured
center frequency and the specified center frequency is displayed in
Hz.
 Time offset: Value to express the level of alignment between BTS
transmission signal and the system time. The time offset between the
BTS reference clock taking PN sequence (PP2S, 1PPS or 10msec)
and the transmission signal.
 Pilot Rho (Waveform Quality): Rho = Correlated Power / Channel
Power
 Rho is the parameter to express the modulation quality, including
EVM and Walsh Channel Power. It covers all errors occurred along CH
the transmission chain such as fault at base-band filtering, fault at I/Q 7
modulator, and distortion in power amplifiers.

EV-DO MAC MAC Channel uses 64 Walsh codes consisting of 1 RA (Reverse Activity)
Channel CDP channel, 59 RPC (Reverse Power Control) channels and 4 reserved
channels. RA channel transmits data to all AT simultaneously and RPC
channels are used to control the power level of each AT within the sector.
Information is transmitted to each I/Q channel where I-channel uses 0 ~31
and Q-channel uses 32 ~63.

Chapter 7
7-30 CDMA TX ANALYZER

EV-DO MAC
Channel CDP
Screen

Figure 32 – 1xEV-DO MAC CDP Measurement Result


 MAC Channel Walsh Channel Allocation Standard
 W64i/2 for MAC Index i = 0,2,4,…,62
 W64(i-1)/2 + 32 for MAC Index i = 1,3,5,…,63
CH
 In I Channel, number 0,2,4....62 Walsh channels are assigned to
7 number 0 to 31 Walsh code space. Thirty two channels after number
32 are not assigned to I channel.
 In Q Channel, number 1,3,5....63 Walsh channels are assigned to
number 33 to 63 Walsh code space. Thirty two channels, from
number 0 to 31 channels, are not assigned to Q channel.

EV-DO MAC  Average Power: Average Power of Time Slot (dBm)


Channel  Pilot Power: MAC Channel Power (dBm)
Measurement  I/Q Max Active: Peak value among Active channel levels
Parameters  I/Q Average Active: Average value of Active channel levels
 I/Q Max InActive: Peak value among In-Active channel levels
 I/Q Avg InActive: Average value of In-Active channel levels
 PN: PN number of the measured EV-DO signal

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-31

EV-DO MAC  Frequency Error: Measurement for the carrier’s center frequency
Channel accuracy transmitted from the BTS. The measured deviation from the
Measurement center frequency and the specified center frequency displayed in Hz.
Parameters  Time offset: Value to express the level of alignment between the BTS
(cont’d) transmission signal and the system time. Time offset between BTS
reference clock taking PN sequence (PP2S, 1PPS or 10msec) and
transmission signal.
 MAC Rho (Waveform Quality): Rho = Correlated Power / Channel
Power
 Rho is the parameter to express the modulation quality including EVM
and Walsh Channel Power. It covers all errors occurred along the
transmission chain such as fault at base-band filtering, fault at I/Q
modulator, and distortion in power amplifiers.

Required 3GPP2 recommends UOCN to be under -27dB in 1xEV-DO MAC CDP.


Specification for EV-
DO MAC Channel

EV-DO Data Traffic channel spreads in W16 Walsh code and 16 code channels are CH
Channel assigned to a single user, not all 16 channels are users, data transmission, 7
Measurement I-channels, and Q-channels are assigned the same codes unlike MAC or
Pilot Channel. Therefore I/Q is not displayed separately in Traffic Channel
and the sum of I/Q power is displayed like cdmaOne and cdma2000.

Chapter 7
7-32 CDMA TX ANALYZER

EV-DO Data
Channel
Measurement
Screen

Figure 33 – 1xEV-DO Data Measurement Result (Idle Slot)

 Max Active: Peak value among Traffic code channels


EV-DO Traffic CDP
CH  Average Active: Average value of Traffic code channels
Measurement
7 Parameters  Average Power: Average power (dBm) of Time Slot
 PN: PN number of the measured EV-DO signal
 Frequency Error: Measurement for the carrier’s center frequency
accuracy transmitted from BTS. The measured deviation from center
frequency and the specified center frequency displayed in Hz.
 Time offset: Value to express the level of alignment between BTS
transmission signal and the system time. Time offset between BTS
reference clock taking PN sequence (PP2S, 1PPS or 10msec) and
transmission signal.
 Waveform Quality (Rho): Rho = Correlated Power / Channel Power
 Rho is the parameter to express the modulation quality including
EVM and Walsh Channel Power. It covers all errors occurred along
the transmission chain such as fault at base-band filtering, fault at I/Q
modulator, and distortion in power amplifiers.

Chapter 7
EVDO TX ANALYZER 7-33

Required 3GPP2 requires for active slots, that the size of each Walsh channel
Specification for EV- power is 1/16 of the nominal power.
DO Traffic Channel
 In Active slot, the size of each Walsh channel power is 1/16 of the
nominal power.
 Nominal Power/16= 0.0625= -12.04dB
 Single Walsh channel power = -12.04±0.5 dB

CH
7

Chapter 7
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-1

8.0 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

In this chapter
WCDMA Analyzer Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 8-2
What is WCDMA ................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Channel Power Measurement Concept ................................................................................................ 8-4
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Concept........................................................................................ 8-4
Spurious Emission Mask Measurement Concept ................................................................................. 8-5
ACLR Measurement Concept ............................................................................................................... 8-5
Code Domain Measurement Concept................................................................................................... 8-6
Modulation Accuracy (Rho) Measurement Concept.............................................................................. 8-6
Using WCDMA Analyzer ............................................................................................................................... 8-7
How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 8-8
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 8-8
Amplitude.............................................................................................................................................. 8-8
Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 8-10
BW/AVG.............................................................................................................................................. 8-12
Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 8-13
Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 8-14
Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 8-15
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 8-15
Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 8-16
Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 8-17 CH
Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................................ 8-17
External Clock Setting ................................................................................................................ 8-18 8
Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................................ 8-20
Channel Power Procedure.......................................................................................................... 8-20
Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................... 8-21
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................... 8-21
Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................................. 8-22
Occupied Bandwidth Screen....................................................................................................... 8-22
Spurious Emission Measurement ....................................................................................................... 8-23
SEM Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 8-23
SEM Screen................................................................................................................................ 8-24
ACLR Measurement ........................................................................................................................... 8-24
ACLR Procedure......................................................................................................................... 8-25
ACLR Screen .............................................................................................................................. 8-25
Code Domain Analysis (Demodulator) ................................................................................................ 8-26
CDP Procedure........................................................................................................................... 8-26
CDP Screen ................................................................................................................................ 8-27
WCDMA OTA Measurement ............................................................................................................... 8-28
OTA Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................... 8-28
OTA Measurement Screen.......................................................................................................... 8-29

Chapter 8
8-2 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

WCDMA ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

WCDMA is a wideband spread-spectrum mobile air interface that utilizes


the direct sequence Code Division Multiple Access signaling method (or
CDMA) to achieve higher speeds and support more users compared to
the implementation of time division multiplexing (TDMA) used by 2G GSM
networks.

Features:
 Radio channels are 5MHz wide.
 Chip rate of 3.84 Mcps
 Supports two basic duplex modes, frequency division and time
division. Current systems use frequency division, one frequency for
uplink and another for downlink. For time division, FOMA uses 16
slots per radio frame, where as UMTS uses 15 slots per radio frame.
 Employs coherent detection on uplink and downlink based on the use
of pilot symbols.
 Supports inter-cell asynchronous operation.
 Variable mission on a 10 ms frame basis.
 Multi-code transmission.
 Adaptive power control based on SIR (Signal-to-Interference Ratio).
CH  Multiuser detection and smart antennas can be used to increase
8 capacity and coverage.
 Multiple types of handoff between different cells including soft handoff,
softer handoff and hard handoff.

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-3

WHAT IS WCDMA W-CDMA is a Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) system. As opposed
to Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), in CDMA, all users transmit at
the same time. Frequency divisions are still used, but at a much greater
bandwidth.

In addition, multiple users share the same frequency carrier. Each user’s
signal uses a unique code that appears to be noise except to the correct
receiver. Therefore, the term channel describes a combination of carrier
frequency and codes. Correlation techniques allow a receiver to decode
one signal among many transmitted on the same carrier at the same time.
A difference between W-CDMA and earlier 2G CDMA systems (like IS-95)
is that W-CDMA uses a wider bandwidth (3.84 MHz, as opposed to 1.23
MHz for IS-95).

W-CDMA is a direct sequence spread-spectrum that supports wider RF


bandwidths, typically from 5 to 20 MHz. W-CDMA uses correlative codes
to distinguish one user from another. Frequency division is still used, as is
done with Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) and Time Division
Multiple Access (TDMA), but in a much larger bandwidth such as 5 MHz or
greater. An initial baseband data rate is spread to a transmitted bit rate of
3.840 Mcps, which is also called chip rate or spread data rate. W-CDMA
realizes increased capacity from 1:1 frequency reuse and sectored cells. CH
The capacity limit is soft. That is, capacity can be increased with some 8
degradation of the error rate or voice quality.

Chapter 8
8-4 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

CHANNEL POWER The Channel Power measurement is a common test used in the wireless
MEASUREMENT industry to measure the total transmitted power of a radio within a defined
CONCEPT frequency channel. This procedure measures the total power within the
defined channel for W-CDMA. This measurement is applied to design,
characterize, evaluate, and verify transmitters and their components or
devices for base stations and mobile stations.

The Channel Power measurement shows the total transmitted power


within the channel integration bandwidth, 5.00 MHz for the W-CDMA mode.
The measurement acquires a number of points representing the input
signal in the time domain. It transforms this information into the frequency
domain using FFT and then calculates the channel power.

To improve repeatability, the number of averaging is increased. The


channel power graph is shown in the graph window, while the absolute
channel power in dBm and the mean power spectral density in dBm/Hz
are shown in the text window.

OCCUPIED Occupied Bandwidth measures the bandwidth containing 99% of the


BANDWIDTH total transmitted power. The spectrum shape of a W-CDMA signal can give
MEASUREMENT a useful qualitative insight into the transmitter’s operation. Any distortion to
CH
CONCEPT the spectrum shape might be an indication of degradation of the
8 transmitter's performance.

With the instrument tuned to a fixed center frequency, samples are


digitized at a high rate with DSP hardware, and then converted to the
frequency domain with FFT software.

The total absolute power within the measurement frequency span is


integrated for its 100% of power. The lower and upper frequencies
containing 0.5% each of the total power are then calculated to get 99.0%
bandwidth.

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-5

SPURIOUS The Spectrum Emission Mask (SEM) measurement includes the in-
EMISSION MASK band and out-of-band spurious emissions. As it applies to W-CDMA, this is
MEASUREMENT the power contained in a specified frequency bandwidth, at certain offsets,
CONCEPT relative to the total carrier power. It may also be expressed as a ratio of
power spectral densities between the carrier and the specified offset
frequency band. It provides useful figures-of-merit for the spectral re-
growth and emissions produced by components and circuit blocks, without
the rigor of performing a full SEM measurement.

The SEM measures spurious signal levels in up to five pairs of offset or


region frequencies and relates them to the carrier power. The reference
channel integration bandwidth method is used to measure the carrier
channel power and offset or region powers. When Offset is selected, SEM
measurements are made relative to the carrier channel frequency
bandwidth. When Region is selected, absolute SEM measurements are
made, specifying the start and stop RF frequencies. In this process, the
reference channel integration bandwidth is analyzed using the
automatically defined resolution bandwidth, which is much narrower than
the channel bandwidth. The results are displayed both as relative power in
dBc, and as absolute power in dBm.

ACLR Adjacent Channel Power Ratio (ACPR), as it applies to W-CDMA, is the CH


MEASUREMENT power contained in a specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the 8
CONCEPT total carrier power. It may also be expressed as a ratio of power spectral
densities between the carrier and the specified offset frequency band. This
is also called Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio (ACLR).

ACPR combines both in-band and out-of-band specifications to provide


useful figures-of-merit for spectral re-growth and emissions produced by
components and circuit blocks without the rigor of performing a full SEM
measurement.

Chapter 8
8-6 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

CODE DOMAIN Code domain power is an analysis of the distribution of signal power
MEASUREMENT across the set of code channels, normalized to the total signal power. To
CONCEPT analyze the composite waveform, each channel is decoded using a code-
correlation algorithm. This algorithm determines the correlation coefficient
factor for each code. Once the channels are decoded, the power in each
code channel is determined. Since the code domain measurements de-
spread and descramble the W-CDMA signal into its physical channels, the
number of active channels of various symbol rates (which are denoted by
widths) can be observed. The width of the channel is inversely
proportional to the Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) code
length in number of bits. In the code domain, there is a fixed amount of
code space for a given chip rate. Therefore, by using the different OVSF
codes, the system can dynamically allocate the code space for lower rate
voice users versus high speed data users.

The code domain power composite view provides information about the in-
channel characteristics of the W-CDMA signal. It directly informs the user
of the active channels with their individual channel power. The composite
view also shows which data rates are active and the corresponding
amount of code space used.

CH Error vector magnitude (EVM) is defined in 3GPP conformance tests for


8 both downlink and uplink. EVM is a common modulation quality metric
widely used in digital communications. Mod accuracy (composite EVM)
measures the EVM of the multi-code channel signal. It is valuable for
evaluating the quality of the transmitter for a multi-channel signal,
detecting spreading or scrambling errors, identifying certain problems
between baseband and RF sections, and analyzing errors that cause high
interference in the signal.

MODULATION Rho is one of the key modulation quality metrics, along with EVM and
ACCURACY (RHO) Code Domain Power. Rho is the ratio of the correlated power in a multi
MEASUREMENT coded channel to the total signal power. This measurement takes into
CONCEPT account all possible error mechanisms in the entire transmission chain
including: baseband filtering, I/Q modulation anomalies, filter amplitude,
phase deviation, and power amplifier distortions. This provides an overall
indication of the performance level of the transmitter.

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-7

USING WCDMA ANALYZER

This section provides details about the W-CDMA communications system


and explains how the various measurements are performed by the
instrument.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis tools for WCDMA system.

 Channel Power
 Occupied Bandwidth
 Spurious Emission
 ACPR (ACLR)
 Demodulator (Code Domain Analyzer)
 OTA
 Auto Measure

CH
8

Chapter 8
8-8 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section describes the instrument’s keys used in WCDMA Tx Analyzer


mode.
Freq/Chan
FREQ/CHAN Sets the Frequency by selecting standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the


spectrum measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key,
the Knob or the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is
completed by selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.
When using the Knob or the arrow keys, the center frequency changes in
predefined frequency steps. The frequency steps can be configured
selecting the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the moving unit of center frequency. Values can be


entered by Data Entry key or changed through the knob. When using Data
Entry key, input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value.
When using the knob or the arrow keys the frequency value is increased
by 0.1MHz.

CH CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected
8 without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom
channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When


the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.
Amplitude
AMPLITUDE When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,
or ACLR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the
minimum and maximum values off the Y-axis of the graph for optimum
display of the traces measured. Each time the AUTO SCALE is selected,
the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum values
with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-9

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using the
spectrum analyzer or Tx Analyzer functions.

Step Description

Amplitude Select from front Hard Key

[Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

<Enter values> Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

Knob Step= 10dB

Table 39 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended
to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level


changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed. CH
8
If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

! allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user
(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input
attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be
displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input
attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to
an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power


Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the
!
JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the
measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input
signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again
and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

Chapter 8
8-10 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, an Amplitude key is


used as below.

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended
to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level


changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

REFERENCE: Selects the relative or absolute value to be displayed.


CH REL: The code domain power is measured relative to channel power.
8 ABS: The code domain power is measured absolute to channel power.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

TRACE/DISPLAY This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, or


SEM measurement mode, a Trace/Display key is used as below.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select
screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are
assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-11

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press
the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with
View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores
hidden traces and information on the window.

 M: Max Hold
 m: Min Hold
 C: Captured Trace
 W: Current Trace
 L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned


trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger
trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller CH
trace on the screen. 8

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared
traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces
cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace
settings.

Chapter 8
8-12 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, the following keys are


also available.

VIEW (ZOOM, FULL): Selects Full or Zoomed screen


POSITION: Assigns the zoom start position
WIDTH (32, 64, 128, 256): Selects the Walsh code width to be displayed

CODOGRAM: Selects codogram view.

CODOGRAM OFF/ON: Turns Codogram view On/Off.

RESET/RESTART: Reset current measurement and restart.

TIME INTERVAL: Selects AM, FM or CW tone to be


demodulated.

AUTO SAVE: Saves the measurement data automatically to


external memory, USB.

TIME CURSOR: Sets Time Cursor on the measurement.

CH
BW/AVG AVERAGE: Sets the number of measurements to be averaged for the
8 trace presentation. A maximum of 99 times of averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a BW/AVG key is used


as below.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-13

MARKER This key is not used in ACLR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,


or Demodulator measurement mode, a Marker key is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six
Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,
and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on
any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y
coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to
the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be


changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active
markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s
number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker
View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In


the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions
when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has
been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions. CH
8
MARKER TYPE:
Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the
reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between
two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,


1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a


Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a
Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes
the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X
and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

Chapter 8
8-14 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are
redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a
measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window


appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the
marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

PEAK SEARCH This key is not used in ACPR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,


or Demodulator measurement mode, a Peak Search key is used as
below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the


highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its
current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its
CH current position.
8
MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of


the trace each time the trace is updated.

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-15

MEASURE When the instrument is in Tx Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to


select measurement menu listed below.

 Channel Power Measurement


 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement
 SEM Measurement
 ACLR Measurement
 Demodulator Measurement
 OTA Measurement
 Auto Measure

MEASURE SETUP This key is not used in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,
and ACLR measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup Key


is used as below.

SCRAMBLE: Selects the scramble code between Auto and Manual.

THRESHOLD: Sets the threshold value between Auto and Manual (default
is -27dBm).

S-CCPCH CH
 S-CCPCH Enable: On/Off 8
 Spreading Factor
 Channel No

PICH
 S-CCPCH Enable: On/Off
 Spreading Factor
 Channel No

LIMIT: Sets the limit on and off.

Chapter 8
8-16 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

DISPLAY
1
OVERVIEW 8

9
2

3 10

4 11

5 12

6 13

Figure 34 – Overview of WCDMA Tx Analyzer Display

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale


information
② Input Attenuation Information
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Number of Averaging
④ Spectrum Window’s X Scale information, RBW, VBW setting value
⑤ Span Setting Information
⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information
CH
⑦ Trace Information
8
C: Captured, M: Max Hold, m: Min Hold
⑧ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key
⑨ Channel Power Measurement Key
⑩ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key
⑪ SEM Measurement Key
⑫ ACLR Measurement Key
⑬ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-17

SETUP It is necessary to setup the frequency information in advance to use the Tx


Analysis function. Analysis for Multi-CH can be done conveniently with the
JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-CH.

Frequency Step Description


Setup Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss
was measured

Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode


[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency


[Start Freq]
[Stop Freq]
[Center Freq]
or
[Center Freq]
[Span]
or
[Unit]
<Freq/Chan> Select Chan
[Channel Standard] Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down Arrow
key
<Select>
Amplitude Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale
[Reference Level]
[Scale Division] CH
[Auto Atten] To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look
8
for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step
Marker Set Marker
[Marker Select] Select M1 ~ M6
[Marker View] On/Off
[Marker Type] Normal/Delta
[Marker Table] When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative coordinates
of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table
Type frequency to set Marker
[Marker Edit]
[Marker ]
<Marker  CF> Set current Marker frequency to center frequency
<Marker  Start> Set current Marker frequency to start frequency
<Marker  Stop> Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency
BW/AVG Set RBW/VBW and Average
[RBW]
[VBW/RBW] Select RBW from screen key
1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003
[SPAN/VBW]
Table 40 – Frequency setup for Tx Analyzer

Chapter 8
8-18 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

External Clock To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurements the JD7105A
Setting must be synchronized with the Base Station. When an external clock is not
supplied, the JD7105A works with a built-in internal high-accuracy time
base; however, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values,
therefore, it is highly recommended to use the same reference clock as
signal source. Sync Mode can be changed in the Setup menu.

Standards

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

Clock switching

(Input signal level

>-3dBm)

External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)

PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In Manual switching

CH (BNC)

8 External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Table 41 – External Clock Operating Standard

Figure 35 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-19

Ext Ref Clock


Port Name Signal Characteristics
Interface
Specification Even Sec Sync In PP2S TTL compatible

10msec

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

Table 42 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

CH
8

Chapter 8
8-20 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

CHANNEL POWER The channel power measurement identifies the channel power within a
MEASUREMENT specified bandwidth (default is 5 MHz, as per the Third-Generation
Partnership Project (3GPP) W-CDMA technical specifications) and the
power spectral density (PSD) in dBm/Hz.

Channel Power
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]
CH [WCDMA] Select WCDMA
8 [Channel Power] Select Channel Power Measurement

Table 43 – WCDMA Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-21

Channel Power
Screen

Figure 36 – WCDMA Channel Power Measurement Screen

OCCUPIED The 3GPP specifications requires the occupied bandwidth (OBW) of a

BANDWIDTH transmitted W-CDMA signal to be less than 5 MHz, where occupied

MEASUREMENT bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth containing 99% of the total channel
power. In this measurement, the total power of the displayed span is
measured. Then the power is measured inward from the right and left CH
extremes until 0.5% of the power is accounted for each of the upper and 8
lower part of the span and the calculated difference is the occupied
bandwidth.

Chapter 8
8-22 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

Occupied Bandwidth Following table shows connection and procedure for Occupied Bandwidth
Procedure Measurement.

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[WCDMA] Select WCDMA

[Occupied Bandwidth] Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

Table 44 – WCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

Occupied Bandwidth
Screen
CH
8

Figure 37 – WCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-23

SPURIOUS The SEM (Spectrum Emission Mask) measurement required by 3GPP


EMISSION specifications encompasses different power limits and different
MEASUREMENT measurement bandwidths (resolution bandwidths) at various frequency
offsets.

SEM Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[WCDMA] Select WCDMA

[SEM] Select SEM Measurement CH


Table 45 – WCDMA Spurious Emission Measurement Procedure 8

Chapter 8
8-24 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

SEM Screen

Figure 38 – WCDMA Spurious Emission Measurement Screen

The ACPR, designated by the 3GPP W-CDMA specifications as the


ACLR
adjacent channel leakage power ratio (ACLR), is a measure of the power
MEASUREMENT
in adjacent channels relative to the transmitted power. The standard
requires the power of both the transmitted and adjacent channels be
CH measured through a root raised cosine filter (RRC) with a roll-off factor of

8 0.22. The W-CDMA ACPR measurement performed in this exercise can


measure up to five adjacent channel pairs with 3GPP compliance. The
RRC filter defaults to “On” when the measurement is first activated, but
may be disabled.

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-25

ACLR Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[WCDMA] Select WCDMA

[ACLR] Select ACLR Measurement

Table 46 – WCDMA ACLR Measurement Procedure

ACLR Screen

CH
8

Figure 39 – WCDMA ACLR Measurement Screen

Chapter 8
8-26 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

CODE DOMAIN The CDP (Code Domain Power) analysis measurement provides a variety
ANALYSIS of different results. First, the code domain power analysis measures the
(DEMODULATOR) distribution of power across the set of code channels, normalized to the
total power. This measurement helps to verify that each code channel is
operating at its proper level and helps to identify problems throughout the
transmitter design from coding to the RF section. System imperfections,
such as amplifier non-linearity, will present themselves as an undesired
distribution of power in the code domain.

CDP Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of The JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

CH Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

8 [Tx Analyzer]

[WCDMA] Select WCDMA

[Demodulator] Select Demodulator Measurement

Table 47 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Procedure

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-27

CDP Screen

Figure 40 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Full Screen

CH
8

Figure 41 – WCDMA Code Domain Analysis Zoomed Screen

Chapter 8
8-28 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

WCDMA OTA The Base Station Analyzer provides OTA - Over The Air measurements for
MEASUREMENT a quick performance characterization of the base station. This function is
especially useful in testing cell sites which are not easily accessible or
OTA Measurement physical connection is not available.
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect Omni/Directional RF Antenna to JD7105A RF In port.

Connect GPS Antenna to JD7105AGPS port.


Modulated signal
(CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA)

RF Antenna GPS Antenna


(Omni or Directional)

BTS

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[TxAnalyzer]
CH [WCDMA] Select WCDMA

8 [OTA] Select OTA Measurement

Measure Setup Set Internal Measurement Parameters

{Scramble Code}, {Auto}/{Manual}

{Threshold}, {Auto}/{Manual}

{S-CCPCH},

{S-CCPCH Enable}/{On/Off}

{Spreading Factor}/{Enter numeric values}

{Channel No.}/{Enter numeric values}

{PICH},

{PICH Enable}/{On/Off}

{Spreading Factor}/{Enter numeric values}

{Channel No.}/{Enter numeric values}

{Limits}

{On}/{Off}

Table 48 – WCDMA OTA Measurement Procedure

Chapter 8
WCDMA TX ANALYZER 8-29

OTA Measurement
Screen

Figure 42 – WCDMA OTA Measurement Screen

 SC Scanner
WCDMA mobile receives signals from multiple base stations, and that
all of these signals share the same spectrum and are present at the
same time, every base station is assigned with unique scrambling
codes differentiating its signal from other base stations in the area.
CH
8
 Multi-path Profile
Multipath profile indicates the amount of power of the dominant pilot
signal that is dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to
multipath echoes (expressed in dB). Ideally, this value should be
very small. Multipath profile is the result of portions of the original
broadcast signal arriving at the receiving antenna out of phase. This
can be caused by the signal being reflected off objects, such as
buildings, or being refracted through the atmosphere differently from
the main signal.

Note that the Multipath Profile is only valid for Over the Air
measurements. It does not apply to Transmitter measurements.

Chapter 8
8-30 WCDMA TX ANALYZER

 Code Domain
Channels with high correlation factors are determined to be active
channels and are indicated as such on the display. Once the
channels are decoded, the analyzer determines the power of each
channel relative to the total signal power.

This measurement helps to verify that each code channel is operating


at its proper level and helps to identify problems throughout the
transmitter design from the coding to the RF section. System
imperfections, such as the non-linearity of amplifiers, will present
themselves as an undesired distribution of power in the code domain.

 Channel Power (dBm)


The channel power measurement indicates the channel power within
a specified bandwidth (default of 3.84MHz).

 CPICH Power (dBm)


The CPICH power is the total power in the dominant pilot signal,
expressed in dBm.

 Latitude, Longitude, Altitude, Satellites Information


CH If a GPS antenna is supplied and locked to the satellites, then the
8 positioning information will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.

Chapter 8
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-1

9.0 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

In this chapter
GSM/EDGE Analyzer Introduction ................................................................................................................ 9-2
What is GSM ........................................................................................................................................ 9-3
Time Slot............................................................................................................................................... 9-4
Channel Power Measurement Concept ................................................................................................ 9-4
Spurious Emission Measurement Concept ........................................................................................... 9-4
Code Domain Measurement Concept (Demodulator) ........................................................................... 9-5
Phase & Frequency Error Measurement Concept ................................................................................ 9-5
Baseband I/Q Measurement Concept................................................................................................... 9-6
Using GSM/EDGE Tx Analyzer .................................................................................................................... 9-7
How to Use Keys .......................................................................................................................................... 9-8
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................. 9-8
Amplitude.............................................................................................................................................. 9-8
Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 9-10
BW/AVG...............................................................................................................................................9-11
Marker ................................................................................................................................................ 9-12
Peak Search ....................................................................................................................................... 9-13
Measure .............................................................................................................................................. 9-13
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................... 9-14
Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 9-15
Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 9-16
Frequency Setup ........................................................................................................................ 9-16
External Clock Setting ................................................................................................................ 9-17
Channel Power Measurement ............................................................................................................ 9-19
Channel Power Procedure .......................................................................................................... 9-19
Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................... 9-20 CH
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................... 9-21
Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ................................................................................................. 9-21 9
Occupied Bandwidth Screen....................................................................................................... 9-22
Spurious Emissions Measurement ..................................................................................................... 9-23
SEM Procedure .......................................................................................................................... 9-23
SEM Screen................................................................................................................................ 9-23
Power vs. Time Measurement ............................................................................................................ 9-24
PvT Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 9-24
PvT Screens ............................................................................................................................... 9-25
I/Q Polar Vector Measurement ........................................................................................................... 9-26
I/Q Polar Vector Procedure ......................................................................................................... 9-26
I/Q Polar Vector Screen .............................................................................................................. 9-27
I/Q Demodulated Bits Measurement ................................................................................................... 9-28
I/Q Demodulated Bits Procedure ................................................................................................ 9-28
I/Q Demodulated Bits Screen ..................................................................................................... 9-29
GSM OTA Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 9-30
OTA Measurement Procedure .................................................................................................... 9-30
OTA Measurement Screen.......................................................................................................... 9-31

Chapter 9
9-2 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

GSM/EDGE ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) is a digital cellular


standard that uses time division multiple access (TDMA) multiplexing
scheme and Gaussian minimum shift keying (GMSK) modulation.

EDGE (Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution), is an enhancement to


GSM that promises to deliver true third-generation (3G) wireless services
such as multimedia and other broadband applications. It uses TDMA and
3π/8 8PSK (phase shift keying) modulation.

The GSM standards define a radio communications system that works


properly only if each component operates within precise specifications.
Essentially, a compromise is established between the link quality
experienced by an individual user and the level of interference
experienced by others. Mobiles and base stations must transmit enough
power, with sufficient fidelity to maintain a call with acceptable quality,
without transmitting excessive power into the frequency channels and
timeslots allocated to others. Receivers must have adequate sensitivity
and selectivity to acquire and demodulate a low-level signal.

This section presents the fundamental RF parametric measurements


necessary to characterize GSM/EDGE base transceiver stations and their
components.
CH
9

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-3

WHAT IS GSM GSM standard defines a voice and data over-air interface between a
mobile radio and the system infrastructure. EDGE (Enhanced Data Rates
for GSM Evolution) enhances the GSM standard by implementing a new
modulation format and filtering designed to provide higher data rates in the
same spectrum. EDGE and GSM signals can be transmitted on the same
frequency, occupying different timeslots, and both use existing GSM
equipment. The GSM digital communications standard employs an 8:1
TDMA, allowing eight channels to use one carrier frequency
simultaneously. The 270.833 kbits/second raw bit rate is modulated on the
RF carrier using Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying (GMSK). The standard
includes multiple traffic channels, a control channel, and a cell broadcast
channel.

The GSM specification defines a channel spacing of 200 kHz. GSM 900,
GSM 450, GSM 480, GSM 850, DCS 1800, and PCS 1900 are GSM-
defined frequency bands. The term GSM 900 is used for any GSM or
EDGE system operating in the 900 MHz band, which includes P-GSM, E-
GSM, and R-GSM.

Primary (or standard) GSM 900 band (P-GSM) is the original GSM band.
Extended GSM 900 band (E-GSM) includes all the P-GSM bands and an
additional 50 channels. Railway GSM 900 band (R-GSM) includes all the
E-GSM band plus additional channels. GSM 450, GSM 480, GSM 700,
and GSM 850 are additional GSM-defined frequency bands that provide
additional bandwidth availability. CH
9
DCS 1800 is an adaptation of GSM 900, created to allow smaller cell sizes
for higher system capacity. PCS 1900 is intended to be identical to DCS
1800 except for frequency allocation and power levels. The term GSM
1800 is sometimes used for DCS 1800, and the term GSM 1900 is
sometimes used for PCS 1900.

Chapter 9
9-4 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

TIME SLOT EDGE and GSM use Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) which divides
each RF channel into eight individual timeslots, thus allowing eight users
to share a single carrier frequency. Users are synchronized to transmit in
series, each in their assigned timeslot. A user may only transmit every
4.62 ms during their timeslot which is 577 μs long. The eight timeslots are
numbered 0 to 7. The 4.62 ms required to cycle through all eight timeslots
is called a frame.

CHANNEL POWER The Channel Power measures in-channel power for GSM and EDGE
MEASUREMENT systems. GSM and EDGE systems use dynamic power control to ensure
CONCEPT that each link is maintained with minimum power. This gives two
fundamental benefits: overall system interference is kept to a minimum
and, in the case of mobile stations, battery life is maximized. The Channel
Power measurement determines the average power of an RF signal burst
at or above a specified threshold value. The threshold value may be
absolute, or relative to the peak value of the signal.

The purpose of the Channel Power measurement is to determine the


power delivered to the antenna system on the RF channel under test. The
instrument acquires a GSM or EDGE signal in the time domain. The
average power level above the threshold is then computed and displayed.

SPURIOUS The Tx Band Spur measurement verifies the transmitter is not


EMISSION transmitting undesirable energy into the transmitted band. This energy
CH MEASUREMENT may cause interference to other users on the GSM system.
9 CONCEPT
The modulation process in a transmitter causes the continuous wave
(CW) carrier to spread spectrally. This is referred to as “spectrum due to
modulation and wideband noise.” Defects in the transmission chain may
cause the spectrum to excessively spread, resulting in interference with
other frequency bands. Measuring the spectrum due to modulation can be
thought of as making an adjacent channel power (ACP) measurement
where several adjacent channels are considered. GSM transmitters ramp
RF power rapidly. The transmitted RF carrier power versus time
measurement is used to ensure that this process happens at the correct
times and fast enough.

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-5

However, if RF power is ramped too quickly, undesirable spectral


components will arise in the transmitted signal. This upsets the “spectrum
due to switching,” which again results in interference with other frequency
bands. Spectrum due to modulation and spectrum due to switching
measurements are usually grouped together and known as the output RF
spectrum. The GSM 3GPP specifications have particular restrictions on
output RF spectrum for a series of frequencies. Verification of compliance
with the 3GPP requires up to 80 dB of dynamic range.

CODE DOMAIN Power vs. Time, Power vs. Time (PvT) measures the mean transmission
MEASUREMENT power during the “useful part” of GSM bursts and verifies that the power
CONCEPT ramp fits within the defined mask. PvT also lets you view the rise, fall, and
(DEMODULATOR) “useful part” of the GSM burst. Using the “Multi-Slot” function, up to eight
slots in a frame can be viewed at a time. GSM is a TDMA scheme with
eight time slots, or bursts, per RF channel; if the burst does not occur at
exactly the right time, or if the burst is irregular, then other adjacent
timeslots can experience interference. Because of this, the industry
standards specify a tight mask for the TDMA burst.

The PvT measurement provides masks for both BTS (Base Transceiver
Station) and MS (mobile station). The timing masks are referenced to the
transition from bit 13 to bit 14 of the mid-amble training sequence. For
GMSK measurements, the 0 dB reference is determined by measuring the
mean transmitted power during the “useful part” of the burst.
CH
PHASE & Phase and frequency error are the measurements of modulation quality 9
FREQUENCY for GSM. Since GSM uses relative phase to transmit information, the
ERROR phase and frequency accuracy of the transmitter are critical to the system
MEASUREMENT performance and ultimately transmission coverage.
CONCEPT
GSM receivers rely on the phase and frequency quality of the 0.3 GMSK
signal in order to achieve the expected carrier to noise performance. A
transmitter with high phase and frequency error is often still able to
support phone calls during a functional test. However, it tends to be more
difficult for mobiles to maintain communication at the edges of the cell,
with low signal levels, or under fading and doppler conditions.

Chapter 9
9-6 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

The phase error of the signal is measured by computing the difference


between the phase of the transmitted signal and the phase of a
theoretically signal. The instrument samples the transmitter output in order
to capture the actual phase trajectory. This is then demodulated and the
ideal phase trajectory is mathematically derived. The error signal is
obtained by subtracting one from the other.

This measurement displays the frequency and phase errors numerically


and graphically, showing the binary representation of the demodulated
data bits.

BASEBAND I/Q In transmitters, the baseband I/Q refers to signals that are composed of
MEASUREMENT individual I/Q modulators, before the I and Q component signals are
CONCEPT combined, and before the up-conversion to IF or RF frequencies. In
receivers, baseband I/Q analysis is used to test the I and Q components
of I/Q demodulators, after an RF signal has been down-converted and
demodulated.

Many measurements related to the characteristics of I and Q signals can


be made when mixed and up-converted to signals in the RF spectrum.
However, measurements which relate to the characteristics of an up-
converted signal that lie beyond the bandwidth available to the baseband
I/Q Input circuit can not be measured (the limits are up to 5 MHz
bandwidth for individual I and Q signals, and up to 10 MHz for composite
CH I/Q signals).
9
Some measurements are appropriate for use with both RF and baseband
I/Q signals without any modification, while others must be altered. Some
examples of measurements with identical results are QPSK EVM, Code
Domain, and CCDF. For Spectrum measurements, identical results include
the I and Q waveform and the I/Q polar representation. For waveform
measurements, identical results include I/Q waveform view, signal
envelope view, and I/Q polar view.

At RF frequencies, power measurements are conventionally displayed on


a logarithmic vertical scale in dBm, whereas measurements of baseband
signals using baseband I/Q inputs may be conveniently displayed as
voltage using a linear vertical scale as well as a log scale.

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-7

USING GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

This section provides details about the GSM and EDGE communications
system and explains how the various measurements are performed by the
instrument.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis tools for GSM/EDGE system.

 Channel Power
 Occupied Bandwidth
 RMS Phase Error
 Peak Phase Error
 Power vs. Time (Slot, Frame)
 Frequency Error
 TSC Code
 IQ Origin Offset
 Constellation
 Data Bit Analysis
 OTA
 Auto Measure

CH
9

Chapter 9
9-8 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

HOW TO USE KEYS

The following describes the primary use of the keys in GSM Tx Analyzer
mode.
Freq/Chan
FREQ/CHAN Sets Frequency and selects standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the


spectrum measurement screen. Values can be entered with the data entry
keys, the arrow keys, or the knob. When data entry keys are used the
input is completed with the unit selection to define the input value. When
the arrow keys or the knob are used, the center frequency changes in
predefined CF steps; the CF steps are user definable in the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the center frequency step units; values can be entered
with the data entry key or the knob. When the data entry keys are used,
the input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value on the
screen key. When the knob is used, the incremental value is 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected
without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom
channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When


CH the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.
9 Amplitude
AMPLITUDE When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,
and ACLR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below.

AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the
minimum and maximum values of a measurement on the Y-axis of the
graph for optimum traces display. Every time the AUTO SCALE key is
selected, the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum
values with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-9

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using


spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer function.

Step Description

Amplitude Select from front Hard Key

[Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

<Enter values> Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

Knob Step= 10dB

Table 49 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended
to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level


changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the

!
allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user CH
(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input
9
attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be
displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input
attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to
an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power


Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the
!
JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the
measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input
signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again
and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

Chapter 9
9-10 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Scanner mode, there is an


additional menu as described below.

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using the
spectrum analyzer or Tx Analyzer functions.

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

TRACE/DISPLAY This key is not used in GSM Analyzer measurement mode.

When the instrument is in GSM Spectrum measurement mode, a


Trace/Display key is used as below.
CH
9 TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select
screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are
assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press
the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with
View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores
hidden traces and information on the window.

 M: Max Hold
 m: Min Hold
 C: Captured Trace
 W: Current Trace
 L: Loaded Trace

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-11

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned


trace number.

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger
trace on the screen.

MIN HOLD: Sets Active trace Min Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the smaller
trace on the screen.

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared
traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces
cannot be restored.
CH
CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace 9
settings.

When the instrument is in Channel Scanner mode, a Trace/Display


key is used as below.

ZOOM START FREQ: Selects the start frequency of the zoom screen.

BW/AVG AVERAGE: Sets the average number of traces. A maximum of 99 times of


averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between "Continue" and "Hold".

Chapter 9
9-12 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

MARKER This key is not used in GSM/EDGE Analyzer mode.

When the instrument is in GSM/EDGE Spectrum or Channel Scanner


mode, a Marker key is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six
Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,
and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on
any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y
coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to
the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be


changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active
markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s
number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker
View On is selected.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In


the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions
when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has
been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:
CH Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the
9 reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between
two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,


1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a


Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a
Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes
the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X
and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-13

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are
redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a
measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window


appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the
marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

PEAK SEARCH This key is not used in GSM Analyzer and Channel Scanner mode.

When the instrument is in GSM Spectrum mode, a Peak Search key


is used as below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the


highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its
current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its
current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace. CH
9
ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of
the trace each time the trace is updated.

MEASURE When the instrument is in Tx Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to


select measurement menu listed below.

 Channel Scanner Measurement


 Channel Power Measurement
 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement
 SEM Measurement
 Demodulator Measurement
 OTA Measurement
 Auto Measure

Chapter 9
9-14 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

MEASURE SETUP This key is not used in Channel Scanner measurement mode.

When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM


and Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup Key is used as below.

GSM/EDGE: Selects the GSM/EDGE signal standards (auto-detect is


default).

TRIGGER: Selects the trigger sources.

RF BURST: Sets the trigger level when using the RF Burst


(wideband) Trigger. The value is relative to the peak of the signal.
RF Burst is also known as RF Envelope.

INTERNAL FB (FREE BURST): Sets the trigger level to FB if


there is a Frequency Burst signal.

RF BURST & TS (TRAINING SEQUENCE): Sets the trigger level


to Training Sequence Code.

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Auto Trigger).

EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger level to external sync reference.

CH DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.


9
RX FILTER: Sets the internal Rx filter bandwidth (100k/200k/400k/624k)

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset on the center frequency

PSK
 PSK DC Offset: Sets the PSK DC Offset
 PSK Constellation: Sets the PSK constellation observation mode

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-15

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW

Figure 43 – Overview of GSM Tx Analyzer Display

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale


information
② Input Attenuation Information
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Number of Averaging
④ Delay & Trigger Mode Setting Information
⑤ GSM/EDGE Selection Information
⑥ Rx (Receive) Filter Setting Information
⑦ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information
⑧ Frequency Offset Information CH
⑨ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key
9
⑩ Channel Power Measurement Key
⑪ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key
⑫ SEM Measurement Key
⑬ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key (PvsT-Slot
or Frame, I/Q Polar Vector, Data Bit Measurement)
⑭ Channel Scanner Measurement

Chapter 9
9-16 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

SETUP It is necessary to setup the frequency information in advance to use the Tx


Analysis function. Analysis for Multi-CH can be done conveniently with the
JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-CH.

Frequency Step Description


Setup Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss
was measured

Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode


[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency


[Start Freq]
[Stop Freq]
[Center Freq]
or
[Center Freq]
[Span]
or
[Unit]
<Freq/Chan> Select Chan
[Channel Standard] Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down Arrow
key
<Select>
Amplitude Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale
[Reference Level]
[Scale Division]
[Auto Atten] To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look
for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step
Marker Set Marker
CH [Marker Select] Select M1 ~ M6
[Marker View] On/Off
9
[Marker Type] Normal/Delta
[Marker Table] When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative coordinates
of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table
Type frequency to set Marker
[Marker Edit]
[Marker ]
<Marker  CF> Set current Marker frequency to center frequency
<Marker  Start> Set current Marker frequency to start frequency
<Marker  Stop> Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency
BW/AVG Set RBW/VBW and Average
[RBW]
[VBW/RBW] Select RBW from screen key
1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003
[SPAN/VBW]
Table 50 – Frequency setup for Tx Analyzer

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-17

External Clock To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurements the JD7105A
Setting must be synchronized with the Base Station. When an external clock is not
supplied, the JD7105A works with a built-in internal high-accuracy time
base; however, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values,
therefore, it is highly recommended to use the same reference clock as
signal source. Sync Mode can be changed in the Setup menu.

Standards

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

Clock switching

(Input signal level

>-3dBm)

External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)

PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In Manual switching

(BNC)

External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Table 51 – External Clock Operating Standard


CH
9

Figure 44 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

Chapter 9
9-18 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Ext Ref Clock Port Name Signal Characteristics


Interface
Even Sec Sync In PP2S TTL compatible
Specification
10msec

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

Table 52 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

CH
9

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-19

CHANNEL POWER The carrier power measures the in-channel power of GSM systems.
MEASUREMENT Mobile devices and base stations must transmit enough power with
sufficient modulation accuracy to maintain a call of acceptable quality
without a power leaking into other frequency channels or timeslots. GSM
systems use dynamic power control to ensure that each link is maintained
with minimum power.

Channel Power
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM] Select GSM

[Channel Power] Select Channel Power Measurement

Table 53 – GSM/EDGE Channel Power Measurement Procedure CH


9

Chapter 9
9-20 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Channel Power
Screen

Figure 45 – GSM/EDGE Channel Power Measurement Screen

CH
9

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-21

OCCUPIED It determines the frequency bandwidth that that contains 99% of the total
BANDWIDTH radiated power.
MEASUREMENT

Occupied Bandwidth
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM] Select GSM

[Occupied Bandwidth] Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

Table 54 – GSM/EDGE Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

CH
9

Chapter 9
9-22 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

Occupied Bandwidth
Screen

Figure 46 – GSM/EDGE Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

CH
9

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-23

SPURIOUS The SEM (Spur Emission Mask) measurement verifies that the transmitter
EMISSIONS does not transmit undesirable energy into the transmission band. This
MEASUREMENT energy may cause interference for other users of the GSM system.

SEM Procedure
Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

! CAUTION RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX

G C 7105A B as e S tation A nalyzer


AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref
+30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional or BTS
G C 7105A B as e S tation A nalyzer
OUT IN
Coupler LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM] Select GSM

[SEM] Select SEM Measurement

Table 55 – GSM/EDGE SEM Measurement Procedure

SEM Screen

CH
9

Figure 47 – GSM/EDGE SEM Measurement Screen

Chapter 9
9-24 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

POWER VS. TIME GSM is a TDMA multiplexing scheme with eight time slots, or bursts, per
MEASUREMENT frequency channel. If the burst does not occur at exactly the right time, or
if the burst is irregular, then adjacent channels can experience
interference. Because of this, industry standards specify a tight mask for
the fit of the TDMA burst.

PvT Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM] Select GSM

[Demodulators] Select Demodulators

[P vs T (Slot)] or [P vs T (Frame)] Select P vs T Slot or Frame Measurement

Table 56 – GSM/EDGE P vs T Measurement Procedure


CH
9

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-25

PvT Screens

Figure 48 – GSM/EDGE P vs T (Slot) Measurement Screen

CH
9

Figure 49 – GSM/EDGE P vs T (Frame) Measurement Screen

Chapter 9
9-26 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

I/Q POLAR Phase and frequency error measurements characterize the modulation
VECTOR quality of GSM systems. Since GSM systems use relative phase to
MEASUREMENT transmit information, phase and frequency accuracy is critical to the
system’s performance. In a real system, poor phase error will reduce the
ability of a receiver to correctly demodulate.

I/Q Polar Vector Constellation diagrams can also be used to observe some aspects of
Procedure modulation accuracy and can reveal certain fault mechanisms such as I/Q
amplitude imbalance or quadrature imbalance.

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM] Select GSM

[Demodulators] Select Demodulators


CH
[Demodulator] Select Demodulator Measurement
9
Table 57 – GSM/EDGE I/Q Polar Vector Measurement Procedure

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-27

I/Q Polar Vector


Screen

Figure 50 – GSM Polar Vector Measurement Screen

CH
9

Figure 51 – EDGE Polar Vector Measurement Screen

Chapter 9
9-28 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

I/Q Provides a view of the numeric results and data bits. The demodulated bits
DEMODULATED in this display are Symbol State bits, and do not represent encoded
BITS message data.
MEASUREMENT

I/Q Demodulated
Bits Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[GSM] Select GSM/EDGE

[Demodulators] Select Demodulators

[Data Bit] Select Data Bit


CH Table 58 – GSM/EDGE I/Q Demodulated Bits Measurement Procedure

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-29

I/Q Demodulated
Bits Screen

Figure 52 – GSM Demodulated Data bits Analysis Screen

CH
9

Figure 53 – EDGE Demodulated Data bits Analysis Screen

Chapter 9
9-30 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

GSM OTA The Base Station Analyzer provides OTA - Over The Air measurements for
MEASUREMENT a quick performance characterization of the base station. This function is
especially useful in testing cell sites which are not easily accessible or
physical connection is not available.

OTA Measurement
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect Omni/Directional RF Antenna to the JD7105A RF In port.

Connect GPS Antenna to the JD7105A GPS port.


Modulated signal
(CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA)

RF Antenna GPS Antenna


(Omni or Directional)

BTS

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[TxAnalyzer]

[GSM] Select GSM/EDGE


CH [OTA] Select OTA Measurement

9
Measure Setup Set Internal Measurement Parameters

{GSM/EDGE}, {Auto}/{GSM}/{EDGE} Select the signal standards.

{Trigger}, Select the triiger sources.

{RF Burst}/{Internal FB}/

{RF Burst & TS}/{Free}/{External}

{Delay}, {Enter numeric values} Set the delay.

{Rx Filter}, Set the type of internal Rx Filter.

{No Filter/100K,200K,400K,624K, Default}

{CF Offset}, {Enter numeric values} Set the CF Offset.

{PSK}, Enable/Disable PSK DC offset and Signal

{PSK DC Offset}/{On/Off} Constellation.

{PSK Constellation}/{On/Off}

Table 59 – GSM/EDGE OTA Measurement Procedure

Chapter 9
GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER 9-31

OTA Measurement
Screen

Figure 54 – GSM/EDGE OTA Measurement Screen

 Rx Power vs. C/I


Channel power measures in a GSM/EDGE frame and C/I (Carrier to
Interference Signal Ratio). The green plot corresponds to the
Received Power (Rx Power) and the yellow plot corresponds to C/I.

 Multi-path Profile & Information


Multipath profile the amount of power, of the dominant signal, that is
dispersed outside the main correlation peak due to multipath echoes
CH
(expressed in dB).
9
Also SNR of these multi-path signals are shown in the Multi-path
information column.

 Rx Power
Channel power measures the average power in a GSM/EDGE frame
in the frequency specified. Out of specification power indicates
system faults. Channel power is expressed in dBm.

 BSIC
It is the Base Station Identity Code.

Chapter 9
9-32 GSM/EDGE TX ANALYZER

 Frame No
TDMA frames are numbered by a frame number (FN). The frame
number is cyclic and have a range of 0 to 3h 28min 53s 760ms as
defined in 3GPP TS 45.010. The frame number will be incremented at
the end of each TDMA frame.

 Frame Time
The time contained in the measured frame.

 C/I (Carrier to Interference Ratio)


Carrier to Interference Ratio is the ratio of the desired carrier power to
the undesired interference signal power in dB.

 Frequency Error
The increase in frequency error of a GSM input signal, which meets
the frequency accuracy requirements of 3GPP recommendation, shall
be lower than 0.05ppm

 Burst Power
Burst power is the average power over the useful part of the first
active burst GSM/EDGE slot. A GSM/EDGE signal has eight time
slots in a frame.

 Modulation Type
CH The modulation type indicates the detected modulation from the
9 received signal, the GSM uses GMSK and the EDGE uses 8PSK.

 Latitude, Longitude, Altitude, Satellites Information


If GPS antenna used and locked to the GPS satellite, then the
positioning information will be displayed on the bottom of the screen.

Chapter 9
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-1

10.0 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

In this chapter
TD-SCDMA Analyzer Introduction .............................................................................................................. 10-2
Frame Structure .................................................................................................................................. 10-3
Time Slot............................................................................................................................................. 10-4
DwPTS ............................................................................................................................................... 10-5
UpPTS ................................................................................................................................................ 10-5
GP ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-5
FDD vs. TDD ...................................................................................................................................... 10-5
Using TD-SCDMA Tx Analyzer ................................................................................................................... 10-6
How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................................ 10-7
Freq/Chan ........................................................................................................................................... 10-7
Amplitude............................................................................................................................................ 10-7
Trace/Display ...................................................................................................................................... 10-9
BW/AVG............................................................................................................................................ 10-10
Marker .............................................................................................................................................. 10-10
Peak Search ..................................................................................................................................... 10-12
Measure ............................................................................................................................................ 10-12
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................. 10-13
Display Overview .............................................................................................................................. 10-16
Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 10-17
Frequency Setup ...................................................................................................................... 10-17
External Clock Setting .............................................................................................................. 10-18
Channel Power Measurement .......................................................................................................... 10-19
Channel Power Procedure........................................................................................................ 10-19
Channel Power Screen ............................................................................................................. 10-20
Occupied Bandwidth Measurement .................................................................................................. 10-21
Occupied Bandwidth Procedure ............................................................................................... 10-21
Occupied Bandwidth Screen..................................................................................................... 10-22
Spectrum Emissions Measurement .................................................................................................. 10-23
SEM Procedure ........................................................................................................................ 10-23
SEM Screen.............................................................................................................................. 10-23 CH
ACLR Measurement ......................................................................................................................... 10-24
ACLR Procedure....................................................................................................................... 10-24 10
ACLR Screen ............................................................................................................................ 10-24
Power vs. Time Measurement .......................................................................................................... 10-25
P vs T Procedure ...................................................................................................................... 10-25
P vs T Screens.......................................................................................................................... 10-26
Code Domain Power (Demodulator) ................................................................................................. 10-28
CDP Procedure......................................................................................................................... 10-28
Code Power Screens ................................................................................................................ 10-29

Chapter 10
10-2 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

TD-SCDMA ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, or TD-SCDMA,


is a 3G mobile telecommunications standard, being pursued in the
People's Republic of China by the Chinese Academy of
Telecommunications Technology (CATT), and it uses TDD, in contrast to
the FDD scheme used by W-CDMA.

TD-SCDMA offers several unique characteristics for 3G services. In


particular its TDD nature allows TD-SCDMA to master asymmetric
services more efficiently than other 3G standards. Uplink and downlink
resources are flexibly assigned according to traffic needs, and flexible data
rate ranging from 1.2 Kbit/s to 2Mbit/s are provided. This is especially
helpful in an environment with increasing data traffic (mobile data), which
tends to be asymmetric, often requiring little uplink throughput, but
significant bandwidth for downloading information (mobile Internet).

Many radio technologies, such as GSM, EDGE, W-CDMA or cdma2000,


require separate bands for uplink and downlink (paired FDD spectrum). In
this case with asymmetric loads, such as Internet access, portions of the
spectrum are occupied but not used for data transfer. These idle resources
cannot be utilized for any other service, leading to an inefficient use of the
spectrum.

On the contrary, TD-SCDMA adapts the uplink/downlink ratio according to


the data load within a single unpaired frequency, thus utilizing the
spectrum more efficiently. Highly effective technologies like smart
antennas, joint detection and dynamic channel allocation are integral
CH features of the TD-SCDMA radio standard. They contribute to minimize

10 intra-cell interference (typical of every CDMA technology) and inter-cell


interference leading to a considerable improvement of the spectrum
efficiency.

Following sub-clause describes the basic frame and resource structure of


TD-SCDMA.

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-3

FRAME There are seven time slots (numbered 0 through 6) in a single 5 ms long
STRUCTURE frame, and within each time slot there are up to 16 code channels that are
available to allocate to a single user or to distribute among multiple users.

No Tx-Rx frequency separation is required as Time Division Duplex (TDD)


is employed. Each sub-frame consists of 7 main timeslots where all main
timeslots (at least the first one) before the single switching point are
allocated UpLink (UL) and all main timeslots (at least the last one) after
the single switching point are allocated DownLink (DL). TDD is used to
separate uplink and downlink periods in a given time frame. Therefore, a
Resource Unit (RU) is defined by a frequency, time slot, and code channel
with spreading factor. The basic resource unit uses a spreading factor of
16.

In TD-SCDMA, the nominal channel spacing is 1.6MHz, but this can be


adjusted to optimize performance in a particular deployment scenario.
And the chip rate is 1.28Mcps and each carrier signal occupies 1.6MHz
bandwidth.

Normal TS Structure
Super Frame (720ms)
675us

Super Frame (720ms) Data Symbols Midamble Data Symbols Guard Period
352 chips 144 chips 352 chips 16 chips

Radio Frame (10ms)


DwPTS Structure
Frame #0 Frame #1 Frame #71 75us
Guard Period SYNC
Sub-Frame (5ms) 32 chips 64 chips

Sub-Frame #0 Sub-Frame #1 UpPTS Structure


125us
Sub-Frame (5ms, 6400chips) SYNC1 Guard Period
128 chips 32 chips
CH
Switching Point

TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS5 TS5 TS6

DwPTS UpPTS Switching Point 10


(96chips) (160chips)
GP
(96chips)

(864 x 7 + 96 + 96 + 160 = 6400 chips: 6400 chips ÷ 5ms = 1.28Mchip/s)

Figure 55 – TD-SCDMA Frame Structure

Chapter 10
10-4 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

TIME SLOT The modulation type can be either QPSK or 8PSK (2 Mbps). For
downlink, the SF (spreading factor) may be 1 or 16. For uplink, the SF
may be 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16.

 Data
For each timeslot, data type depends on the channel selection.
Available data choices for common physical channels include: PN9
and PN15 sequences, user-defined data, and transport channel data.
For multiframe generation, data is continuous across all packets.
For multicarrier generation, data on each channel is independent.
 Midamble
The midamble is used as a training sequence for channel estimation,
power measurements, and synchronization. Up to 16 timeslot
midamble codes of length 144 can be generated from a basic
midamble code of length 128. (The basic midamble codes are
repeated to fill the length.) The actual midamble code transmitted
from the midamble field in the time slot depends on the user number
and the total number of users allocated the same basic midamble
sequence. The midamble used by each user has a unique shift from
the basic midamble code, thus providing channel information for
different users by one correlation.

CH Up to 16 Codes
depending on Max. used ram
e
Spreading factor e-f
Tim 5ms
10

1.6 M
Hz

Figure 56 – TD-SCDMA Resource Structure

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-5

DWPTS Downlink Pilot Time Slot, 96 chip duration. DwPTS is used for downlink
synchronization. During the cell search procedure, the UE acquires the
timing of the DwPTS by correlating with the SYNC-DL code transmitted in
the DwPTS. The UE must identify which SYNC-DL sequence is used out
of 32 SYNC-DL possible sequences. Since each SYNC-DL is mapped to
four basic midamble codes (there are 128 basic midamble codes in total),
the UE can identify which basic midamble code is used at the Node-B.
Knowing the basic midamble code also identifies the unique associated
scrambling code.

UPPTS Uplink Pilot Time Slot, 160 chip duration. UpPTS is used by Node B to
determine the received power level and the received timing from the UE.
In order to reduce interference to traffic channels resulting from the
unsynchronized uplink, the first transmission from the UE at the uplink
direction has to be in the UpPTS. The timing used for the UpPTS
transmission is estimated from the received power level of the DwPTS
and/or P-CCPCH. The Node-B then detects the SYNC-UL (128 codes in
total) transmitted in the UpPTS and issues timing commands to the UE for
adjusting its new transmission time in a resolution of 1/8 chips.

GP Guard period between DwPTS and UpPTS determines the maximum cell
size. This main guard period is 96 chips long which is different from other
normal guard periods of 16 chips between time slots. The GP insures that
a UE transmitting the UpPTS does not disturb the reception of the DwPTS
for other close-by UEs 96 chip duration.

FDD VS. TDD The key technologies used in TD-SCDMA as followed.


 Separate Uplink and Downlink by adopting TDD. CH
 Separate different users by using TDMA and CDMA so it can reduce 10
the number of users in each timeslot, which reduces the
implementation complexity of multiuser detection and beam-forming
schemes.

FDD Component TDD Component


Technology WCDMA TD-SCDMA
Bandwidth 2 x 5MHz paired 1 x 1.6MHz unpaired
Frequency Reuse 1 1 or 3
Handover Hard, Soft, Softer Hard
Modulation Type QPSK QPSK and 8-PSK
Chip Rate 3.84 MCPS 1.28 MCPS
Spreading Factor 4 ~ 256 1,2,4,8,16
Timeslots/Frame -- 7
Table 60 – FDD and TDD component comparison

Chapter 10
10-6 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

USING TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

This section provides details about the TD-SCDMA communications


system and explains how the various measurements are performed by the
instrument.

The JD7105A provides the following analysis tools for TD-SCDMA system.

 Channel Power
 Adjacent Channel Leakage Power Ration (ACLR)
 Spurious Emission Mask (SEM)
 Occupied Bandwidth
 Code Power
 Power vs. Time (Frame, Slot and Mask)
 Timing Offset
 Frequency Error
 IQ Origin Offset (Constellation)
 Multi-ACLR
 OTA
 Auto Measure

CH
10

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-7

HOW TO USE KEYS

The following describes the primary use of the keys in TD-SCDMA Tx


Analyzer mode.
Freq/Chan
FREQ/CHAN Sets Frequency and selects standard or custom frequency bands.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the


spectrum measurement screen. Values can be entered with the data entry
keys, the arrow keys, or the knob. When data entry keys are used the
input is completed with the unit selection to define the input value. When
the arrow keys or the knob are used, the center frequency changes in
predefined CF steps; the CF steps are user definable in the CF Step Menu.

CF STEP: Defines the center frequency step units; values can be entered
with the data entry key or the knob. When the data entry keys are used,
the input is completed by selecting the unit to define the input value on the
screen key. When the knob is used, the incremental value is 0.1MHz.

CHANNEL STANDARD: Using this key, the channel band can be selected
without setting Start, Stop, and Center frequencies. The saved custom
channel bands will pop-up to select the proper band.

UNIT: Selects the unit to be used, either Frequency or Channel. When


the “Chan” is selected, the CF Step corresponds to Channel Step.
Amplitude
AMPLITUDE When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,
and ACLR measurement mode, an Amplitude key is used as below. CH
10
AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the
minimum and maximum values of a measurement on the Y-axis of the
graph for optimum traces display. Every time the AUTO SCALE key is
selected, the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum
values with margin on the Y-axis of the screen display.

Chapter 10
10-8 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

REFERENCE LEVEL: Sets the Y-axis maximum range when using


spectrum analyzer or TX Analyzer function.

Step Description

Amplitude Select from front Hard Key

[Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

<Enter values> Enter Ref. Level using Data entry key

[dBm]/[-dBm] or [Ref Level] Select from Screen Menu

Knob Step= 10dB

Table 61 – Ref Level Setting Procedure

ATTENUATOR

AUTO: Input Attenuator’s value is automatically set depending on the


reference level. This is the default operation mode, so it is recommended
to use this mode unless a special measurement condition is needed.

MANUAL: Sets the In-Port attenuator’s value. The reference level


changes according to the change of the attenuator’s value, but the
attenuator’s value doesn’t change when the reference level is changed.

If the input signal level is lower than +30dBm or higher than the
allowable input limit per input attenuator’s value set by the user
!
(total input power must be lower than 0dBm when input
attenuation setting is +20dB), A “Final IF Overload” message will be
displayed on the upper side of the screen indicating that the input
CH
attenuation’s value must be increased. When the instrument is exposed to
10
an over power condition for a long time, its performance may be degraded.

When the input power level exceeds +35dBm, an “Over Power


Alarm” message will be displayed on the screen and the
!
JD7105A disconnects its internal RF Input path and all the
measurements are stopped. In this case, disconnect the external input
signal and wait until the JD7105A measures the input signal level again
and the “Over Power Alarm” message is not displayed.

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-9

RF IN LOSS: Sets an external offset value. An offset consists of a cable


offset and a user offset, and the measurement result shows the value
reflecting both offset values. Even if an offset is set, the reference level is
automatically adjusted to avoid the waveform fitting out of the screen. An
offset value set in Spectrum mode have precedence over the offset value
set in Analysis Mode.

TRACE/DISPLAY This key is not used in TD-SCDMA Analyzer measurement mode.

When the instrument is in TD-SCDMA Spectrum measurement mode,


a Trace/Display key is used as below.

TRACE SELECT: Selects an active trace from T1 ~ T6. Every time Select
screen menu is pressed, the active trace changes. Trace numbers are
assigned to each captured traces or loaded traces.

TRACE VIEW: Hides or displays the trace number on the screen. Press
the Select screen menu key to choose the Trace number. Traces with
View set OFF are hidden from the screen. Setting View On restores
hidden traces and information on the window.

 M: Max Hold
 m: Min Hold
 C: Captured Trace
 W: Current Trace
 L: Loaded Trace

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen with assigned CH


trace number. 10

CLEAR WRITE: Clear selected Trace and Write (Assign) current trace.

MAX HOLD: Sets Active trace Max Hold. Active trace compares newly
acquired data with the trace shown on the screen and displays the bigger
trace on the screen.

Chapter 10
10-10 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

TRACE CLEAR: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with Trace View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared
traces cannot be restored.

CLEAR CURRENT: Deletes an active trace from the screen. The cleared
trace is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace one by one
when multiple traces are displayed on the screen. Verify the traces to
delete with View ON/OFF function in advance settings as cleared traces
cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all traces from the instrument and initialize the trace
settings.

BW/AVG AVERAGE: Sets the average number of traces. A maximum of 99 times of


averaging can be set.

SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between “Continue” and “Hold”.

MARKER This key is not used in TD-SCDMA Analyzer mode.

When the instrument is in TD-SCDMA Spectrum mode, a Marker key


is used as below.

Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six
Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,
CH and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on

10 any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y


coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to
the description of each measurement after this chapter.

MARKER SELECT: Selects an active marker which its position can be


changed with the knob or the arrow keys. The assigned number of active
markers is displayed on the Marker Select screen menu and the marker’s
number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace when the Marker
View On is selected.

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-11

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In


the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions
when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has
been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:
Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the
reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between
two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,


1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a


Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a
Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes
the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X
and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are
redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a
measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window


appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the
marker position is moved to the setting frequency.
CH
10

Chapter 10
10-12 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

PEAK SEARCH This key is not used in TD-SCDMA Analyzer mode.

When the instrument is in TD-SCDMA Spectrum mode, a Peak Search


key is used as below.

Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the


highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its
current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its
current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

ALWAYS PEAK: Moves the marker automatically to the highest peak of


the trace each time the trace is updated.

MEASURE When the instrument is in TD-SCDMA Spectrum or TD-SCDMA


Analyzer Mode, Measure key is used to select measurement menu
listed below.

 Channel Power Measurement


 Occupied Bandwidth Measurement
CH  SEM Measurement

10  ACLR Measurement
 Multi-ACLR Measurement
 Demodulator Measurement
 OTA Measurement
 Auto Measure

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-13

MEASURE SETUP When the instrument is in Channel Power, Occupied Bandwidth, SEM,
and ACLR mode, a Measure Setup key is used as below.

TRIGGER MODE: Selects the trigger sources.

INTERNAL (RF BURST AND DWPTS): Sets the trigger point to


the internal frequency burst and DwPTS.

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Free Running).

EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger source to external sync reference.

GPS: Sets the trigger source to external GPS reference.

DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset of the center frequency.

When the instrument is in Multi-ACLR mode, a Measure Setup key is


used as below.

TRIGGER MODE: Selects the trigger sources.

INTERNAL (RF BURST AND DWPTS): Sets the trigger point to


the internal frequency burst and DwPTS

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Free Running)


CH
EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger source to external sync reference 10

GPS: Sets the trigger source to external GPS reference

DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset of the center frequency.

LOWEST FREQ: Sets the lowest frequency to be measured.

HIGHEST FREQ: Sets the highest frequency to be measured.

Chapter 10
10-14 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

When the instrument is in Multi-ACLR mode, a Measure Setup key is


used as below.

TRIGGER MODE: Selects the trigger sources.

INTERNAL (RF BURST AND DWPTS): Sets the trigger point to


the internal frequency burst and DwPTS.

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Free Running).

EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger source to external sync reference.

GPS: Sets the trigger source to external GPS reference.

DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset of the center frequency.

LOWEST FREQ: Sets the lowest frequency to be measured.

HIGHEST FREQ: Sets the highest frequency to be measured.

When the instrument is in Demodulator mode, a Measure Setup key


is used as below.

SCRAMBLE CODE: Sets the method of Scramble code search.

CH MANUAL: Search manually set by user.

10
AUTO: Auto Search.

TRIGGER MODE: Selects the trigger sources.

INTERNAL (RF BURST AND DWPTS): Sets the trigger point to


the internal frequency burst and DwPTS.

FREE: Sets the Free Trigger (Free Running).

EXTERNAL: Sets the trigger source to external sync reference.

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-15

GPS: Sets the trigger source to external GPS reference.

SPREAD FACTOR: Sets the Spread Factor from Auto, SF1 ~ SF16. User
can designate Spread Factor by selecting SF1 ~ SF16.

MAX USER: Sets the number of users up to 16.

SLOT NUMBER: Sets the Time Slot number to be displayed in the


measurement screen. Slot number can be set from TS0 ~ TS6.

THRESHOLD: Sets the threshold level to get automatic pass/fail indication.

DETECT MODE: Selects the modulation types, Auto, QPSK, 8-PSK and
Peak. When Peak is selected, the instrument determines modulation
type by checking highest power component from QPSK, 8PSK or PEAK.

SCRAMBLE MAP: Sets the types of detecting method to determine


Midamble/Channel estimation either full search or max power search.

MAX: Determine using Max Power.

SPEC: Search based on TD-SCDMA specification.

DC ON/OFF: Turns DC component On or Off to calculate EVM, PCDE, etc.

DELAY: Sets the delay in either us (micro-second) or symbol.

CF OFFSET: Sets the offset of the center frequency. CH


10

Chapter 10
10-16 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW 1 7

8
2

3 9

4
10

5 11

6 12

Figure 57 – Overview of GSM Tx Analyzer Display

① Reference Level, Scale Division: Spectrum Window’s Y Scale


information
② Input Attenuation Information
[A]: Auto mode, [M]: Manual mode, [P]: Pre-amp On
③ Number of Averaging
④ RBW and VBW Setting Information
⑤ Span Setting Information
⑥ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information
⑦ Measure ON/OFF Screen Key
⑧ Channel Power Measurement Key
⑨ Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Key
⑩ SEM Measurement Key

CH ⑪ ACLE Measurement Key


⑫ Demodulator (Code Domain Analysis) Measurement Key
10
- P vs T (Slot, Frame, and Mask)
- Code Power
- Midamble Power
- Symbol Data
- Code Error
- Constellation

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-17

SETUP It is necessary to setup the frequency information in advance to use the Tx


Analysis function. Analysis for Multi-CH can be done conveniently with the
JD7105A as it provides the analysis tool for Multi-CH.

Frequency Step Description


Setup Connect Cable Connect signal to RF In port using the cable whose loss
was measured

Mode Select Spectrum Analyzer mode


[Spectrum]

Freq/Chan Set Frequency


[Start Freq]
[Stop Freq]
[Center Freq]
or
[Center Freq]
[Span]
or
[Unit]
<Freq/Chan> Select Chan
[Channel Standard] Browse Channel Standard using Knob or Up/Down Arrow
key
<Select>
Amplitude Set Atten./Ref. Level/Scale
[Reference Level]
[Scale Division]
[Auto Atten] To optimize S/N, change Atten mode to manual and look
for optimization value by changing Atten in 5dB step
Marker Set Marker
[Marker Select] Select M1 ~ M6
[Marker View] On/Off
[Marker Type] Normal/Delta
[Marker Table] When Marker Table is on, absolute or relative coordinates
of all Maker are displayed on Marker Table CH
Type frequency to set Marker
10
[Marker Edit]
[Marker ]
<Marker  CF> Set current Marker frequency to center frequency
<Marker  Start> Set current Marker frequency to start frequency
<Marker  Stop> Set current Marker frequency to stop frequency
BW/AVG Set RBW/VBW and Average
[RBW]
[VBW/RBW] Select RBW from screen key
1. 0.3, 0.1, 0.03, 0.01, 0.003
[SPAN/VBW]
Table 62 – Frequency Setup for Tx Analyzer

Chapter 10
10-18 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

External Clock To enhance the reliability of Code Domain measurements the JD7105A
Setting must be synchronized with the Base Station. When an external clock is not
supplied, the JD7105A works with a built-in internal high-accuracy time
base; however, some measurement results may exhibit inaccurate values,
therefore, it is highly recommended to use the same reference clock as
signal source. Sync Mode can be changed in the Setup menu.

Standards

Clock Type Reference Port Switching

Standard

10MHz Internal Internal 10MHz Default

External External Ref Ext Ref In (SMA) Automatic

Clock switching

(Input signal level

>-3dBm)

External GPS GPS clock GPS (SMA) Automatic

switching (GPS

signal received)

PP2S Internal Internal Sync Default

External External Sync Even Sec/ Sync In Manual switching

(BNC)

External GPS GPS GPS (SMA) Manual switching

Table 63 – External Clock Operating Standard


CH
10

Figure 58 – Ext Ref Clock Input Ports

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-19

Ext Ref Clock


Port Name Signal Characteristics
Interface
Specification Even Sec Sync In PP2S TTL compatible

10msec

Ext Ref In 10MHz Analog:

-10 ~ +10dBm

Table 64 – Ext. Ref. Clock Interface Spec

CHANNEL POWER The Channel Power measurement determines the average power of an
MEASUREMENT RF signal burst at or above a specified threshold value. The threshold
value may be absolute, or relative to the peak value of the signal.

The purpose of the Channel Power measurement is to determine the


power delivered to the antenna system on the RF channel under test. The
instrument acquires a TD-SCDMA signal in the time domain. The
average power level above the threshold is then computed and displayed.

Channel Power
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE
RF In RF Out
! CAUTION
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE
CH
N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

RF In RF Out
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref
10
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA] Select TD-SCDMA

[Channel Power] Select Channel Power Measurement

Table 65 – TD-SCDMA Channel Power Measurement Procedure

Chapter 10
10-20 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Channel Power
Screen

Figure 59 – TD-SCDMA Channel Power Measurement Screen

CH
10

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-21

OCCUPIED Occupied bandwidth is a measure of the bandwidth containing 99% of the


BANDWIDTH total integrated power for transmitted spectrum and is centered on the
MEASUREMENT assigned channel frequency. The occupied channel bandwidth is about
1.6 MHz based on a chip rate of 1.28Mcps.

Occupied Bandwidth
Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA] Select TD-SCDMA

[Occupied Bandwidth] Select Occupied Bandwidth Measurement

Table 66 – TD-SCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Procedure

CH
10

Chapter 10
10-22 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Occupied Bandwidth
Screen

Figure 60 – TD-SCDMA Occupied Bandwidth Measurement Screen

CH
10

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-23

SPECTRUM
EMISSIONS In this measurement, the spurious transmissions (whether modulated or
MEASUREMENT un-modulated) and the switching transients are specified together by
measuring the peak power in a given bandwidth at various frequencies.
SEM Procedure
Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA] Select TD-SCDMA

[SEM] Select SEM Measurement

Table 67 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Procedure

SEM Screen

CH
10

Figure 61 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Screen

Chapter 10
10-24 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

ACLR The ACLR (Adjacent Channel Leakage power Ratio), measures the power
MEASUREMENT contained in a specified frequency channel bandwidth relative to the total
carrier power (mean power).
ACLR Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA] Select TD-SCDMA

[ACLR] Select ACLR Measurement

Table 68 – TD-SCDMA ACLR Measurement Procedure

ACLR Screen

CH
10

Figure 62 – TD-SCDMA SEM Measurement Screen

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-25

POWER vs. TIME The Power vs. Time (P vs T) measurement analyzes the amplitude profile
MEASUREMENT and timing of the burst signal and provides a time mask for the signal. It
measures the mean transmit power during the “useful part” of TD-SCDMA
bursts and verifies that the power ramp fits within the defined mask. TD-
SCDMA is a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) scheme with seven
time slots, or bursts, per RF channel and by using the “Multi-Slot” function,
up to seven slots in a frame can be viewed at one time.

P vs T Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA] Select TD-SCDMA

[Demodulator] Select Demodulators

[P vs T (Slot)] or Select P vs T Slot or Frame or Mask Measurement

[P vs T (Frame)] or

[P vs T (Mask)]

Table 69 – TD-SCDMA P vs T Measurement Procedure


CH
10

Chapter 10
10-26 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

P vs T Screens

Figure 63 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Slot) Measurement Screen

CH
10

Figure 64 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Frame) Measurement Screen

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-27

Figure 65 – TD-SCDMA P vs T (Mask) Measurement Screen

CH
10

Chapter 10
10-28 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

CODE DOMAIN TD-SCDMA receivers rely on the frequency or phase quality of the QPSK
POWER or 8-PSK signal in order to achieve the expected carrier to noise
(DEMODULATOR) performance. A transmitter with high frequency or phase error is often
still able to support phone calls during a functional test.

This measurement displays the frequency errors numerically and


graphically, showing the binary representation of the demodulated data
bits of the received signal using Code Power, Midamble Power, Symbol
Data, Code Error and Constellation screens.

CDP Procedure

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

CAUTION RF In RF Out
!
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional BTS
JD7105A Base Station Analyzer OUT
Coupler
IN or
LPA
-50 dB

Mode Select Tx Analyzer mode

[Tx Analyzer]

[TD-SCDMA] Select TD-SCDMA

[Demodulator] Select Demodulators

[Code Power] or Select Demodulator Measurements


CH
[Midamble Power] or
10
[Symbol Data] or

[Code Error] or

[Constellation]

Table 70 – TD-SCDMA Demodulator Measurement Procedure

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-29

Code Power
Screens

Figure 66 – TD-SCDMA Code Power Measurement Screen

CH
10

Figure 67 – TD-SCDMA Midamble Power Measurement Screen

Chapter 10
10-30 TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER

Figure 68 – TD-SCDMA Symbol Data Measurement Screen

CH
10

Figure 69 – TD-SCDMA Code Error Measurement Screen

Chapter 10
TD-SCDMA TX ANALYZER 10-31

Figure 70 – TD-SCDMA Constellation Measurement Screen

CH
10

Chapter 10
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-1

11.0 CABLE & ANTENNA ANALYZER

In this chapter
Cable and Antenna Analyzer Introduction ....................................................................................................11-2
Standing Wave Ratio ...........................................................................................................................11-3
Practical implications of SWR ..............................................................................................................11-3
Return loss ..........................................................................................................................................11-4
DTF......................................................................................................................................................11-5
Cable Loss ...........................................................................................................................................11-5
Using Cable and Antenna Analyzer .............................................................................................................11-6
How to Use Keys .........................................................................................................................................11-7
Freq/Chan ............................................................................................................................................11-7
Amplitude.............................................................................................................................................11-7
Trace/Display .......................................................................................................................................11-8
BW/AVG...............................................................................................................................................11-9
Marker .................................................................................................................................................11-9
Peak Search ......................................................................................................................................11-10
Measure .............................................................................................................................................11-10
Measure Setup ..................................................................................................................................11-10
VSWR ........................................................................................................................................................ 11-11
VSWR Display ................................................................................................................................... 11-11
Setting Frequency..............................................................................................................................11-13
Setting Trace Point ............................................................................................................................11-19
Scale Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................11-19
Using Markers....................................................................................................................................11-19
Using Limit Line .................................................................................................................................11-20
DTF Display .......................................................................................................................................11-21
DTF ...........................................................................................................................................................11-21
DTF Display .......................................................................................................................................11-21
DTF Setup .........................................................................................................................................11-23
Scale Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................11-28
Using Markers....................................................................................................................................11-28
Using Limit Line .................................................................................................................................11-30
Cable Loss (One Port Measurement) ........................................................................................................11-31
Cable Loss Display ............................................................................................................................11-31
Setting Frequency..............................................................................................................................11-33
Scale Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................11-37
Using Markers....................................................................................................................................11-37 CH
Using Limit Line .................................................................................................................................11-37
Gain/Loss (Two Ports Measurement) ........................................................................................................11-39 11
Gain/Loss Display ..............................................................................................................................11-39
Setting Frequency..............................................................................................................................11-41
Scale Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................11-46
Using Markers....................................................................................................................................11-46
Using Limit Line .................................................................................................................................11-47

Chapter 11
11-2 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER INTRODUCTION

A large number of abnormal cell site problems are typically caused by the
antenna system, cable and connectors, or both. It’s important to have the
right instrument available when either servicing or certifying cell sites for
operation.

The JD7105A Cable and Antenna Analyzer is a diagnostic tool needed to


accurately detect operational problems. The JD7105A has all of the
measurement functions necessary to accurately verify antenna systems
from Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) to power measurements. In
addition, the JD7105A makes distance-to-fault measurements to
accurately pinpoint the fault’s location.

The Cable and Antenna Analyzer’s key measurements are:


 VSWR
 Distance to Fault
 One Port Loss
 Insertion Gain/Loss

To get maximum power into a load it is required that the load impedance
match the generator impedance. Any difference in impedance or
mismatching would not produce maximum power transfer. An impedance
mismatch at the antenna system produces a reflective 'traveling wave'
which goes in the opposite direction from the incident wave. As the two
traveling waves cross each other in opposite direction, it is produce an
interference pattern called a "standing wave". VSWR is the ratio between
the power sent forward to the cable and/or antenna and the amount of
power that is reflected back to the transmitter.

CH Some of the consequences of having a high VSWR condition in cellular


services are: dropped calls, poor reception, and an overall unacceptable
11
performance in the cell (or section of cell) covered by the base station
antenna. Therefore, the VSWR of the antenna system including the feed
line is one of the most critical factors in the service and maintenance of
the RF transmitter systems.

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-3

STANDING WAVE In telecommunications, standing wave ratio (SWR) is the ratio of the
RATIO amplitude of a partial standing wave at its maximum amplitude and at its
minimum, in an electrical transmission line.

The SWR is usually defined as a voltage ratio called the VSWR, for
voltage standing wave ratio. For example, the VSWR value 1.2:1 denotes
a maximum standing wave amplitude that is 1.2 times greater than the
minimum standing wave value. It is also possible to define the SWR in
terms of current, resulting in the ISWR, which has the same numerical
relationship. The power standing wave ratio (PSWR) is defined as the
square of the VSWR.

PRACTICAL SWR has a number of implications that are directly applicable to RF radios.
IMPLICATIONS OF
SWR  SWR is an indicator of reflected waves bouncing back and forth within
the transmission line, and as such, an increase in SWR corresponds
to an increase in power in the line beyond the actual transmitted
power. This increased power will increase RF losses, as increased
voltage increases dielectric losses, and increased current increases
resistive losses.
 A transmission line with matched impedances gives an ideal power
transfer; mismatched impedances give high SWR and reduced power
transfer.
 Higher power in the transmission line also leaks back into the RF
radio, which may cause the radio to over heat.
 The higher voltages associated with a sufficiently high SWR could
damage the transmitter. Solid state radios which have a lower
tolerance for high voltages may automatically reduce its output power
to prevent damage. The high voltages may also cause transmission
line dielectric to break down and/or to burn.
 VSWR measurements may be taken to ensure that a waveguide is CH
contiguous and has no leaks or sharp bends. If such bends or holes
11
are present in the waveguide surface, they may diminish the
performance of transmitter and receiver equipment strings.

Chapter 11
11-4 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

PRACTICAL  Another cause of bad VSWR in a waveguide is moisture build-up,


IMPLICATIONS OF which can typically be prevented with silica gel or pressurization of
SWR (cont’d) the waveguide with dry gas.
 A very long run of coaxial cable especially at a frequency where the
cable itself is loose can appear to a radio as a matched load. The
power coming back is, in these cases, partially or almost completely
lost in the cable run.

RETURN LOSS In telecommunications, return loss is a measure of power reflected from


imperfections in an electrical or optical communications link. It is the ratio
(PR / PT), representing the power of the wave reflected from the
imperfection (PR) to that of the incident, or transmitted, wave, (PT). For
maximum transmitted power, the return loss should be as small as
possible, meaning the ratio PR / PT should be as small as possible.

Return loss is usually expressed in dB, the return loss value describes the
reduction in amplitude of the reflected energy, as compared to the forward
energy. It will always be a loss, and therefore a negative dB. However one
can write -3 dB as simply 3 dB of loss, dropping the negative sign and
adding loss. For example, if a device has 15 dB of return loss, the
reflected energy from that device (PR), is always 15 dB lower than the
transmitted energy (PT). When expressed in dB, larger (in magnitude)
negative numbers represent larger return losses and thus smaller
reflected power (PR).

In electrical systems, return losses often occur at junctions between


transmission lines and terminating impedances. It is a measure of the
dissimilarity between impedances in metallic transmission lines and loads.
For devices that are not perfect transmission lines or purely resistive loads,
the return loss value varies with the frequency of the transmitted signal.

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-5

DTF While VSWR is an indicator to express the efficiency of the antenna’s


energy transmission, DTF is a measurement to identify the fault locations
in the antenna line system. Most of the antenna line system consists of
various types of coaxial cables, connectors and devices such as dividers
and surge arrestors.

Since VSWR is a measurement to verify the impedance discontinuity of


the total feed line system, it is necessary to perform DTF measurement to
identify the exact component that is contributing to the performance of the
line system. The DTF measurement makes it easy to identify the fault
location by displaying the relative distance of the signal reflections or
discontinuities from various points of the line system.

CABLE LOSS The cable loss measurement feature checks the signal attenuation level of
the cable system. The frequency band to measure the characteristics of a
cable must be calibrated before performing the cable loss measurement.

CH
11

Chapter 11
11-6 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

USING CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

This section provides a basic usage of the keys in the Cable and Antenna
Analyzer and explains how the various measurements are performed by
the instrument.

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-7

HOW TO USE KEYS

The following describes the primary use of the keys in Cable and Antenna
Analyzer mode.
Freq/Chan
FREQ/CHAN Sets the Frequency and selects standard or custom frequency bands.

START FREQUENCY: Changes the Start frequency in the spectrum


measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or
the arrow keys. When using the Data Entry key, the input is completed by
selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

STOP FREQUENCY: Changes the Stop frequency in the spectrum


measurement. Values can be entered with the Data Entry key, the knob or
the arrow keys. When the Data Entry key is used the input is completed by
selecting the soft key with the corresponding value unit.

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency setup in the


spectrum measurement screen. Values can be entered with the data entry
keys, the arrow keys, or the knob. When data entry keys are used the
input is completed with the unit selection to define the input value. When
the arrow keys or the knob are used, the center frequency changes in
predefined CF steps; the CF steps are user definable in the CF Step Menu.

BAND LIST: The frequency band is selected without defining the start,
stop, and center frequencies. The saved custom bands window is shown
to select the bands available.

SPAN: This key is used to set the frequency range over which the
instrument will sweep.
Amplitude CH
AMPLITUDE AUTO SCALE: The instrument can automatically set the scale to the
11
minimum and maximum values of a measurement on the Y-axis of the
graph for optimum traces display. Every time the AUTO SCALE key is
selected, the top and bottom scales are set to the minimum and maximum
values with margin on the Y-axis of the screen.

MAX (TOP): Sets the maximum display range (Y-scale), which is the top of
the measurement screen.

Chapter 11
11-8 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

MIN (BOTTOM): Sets the minimum display range (Y-scale), which is the
bottom of the measurement screen.

SCALE: Changes Y-scale in VSWR or Return Loss.

LIMIT: Sets the limit to On or Off.

LIMIT LEVEL: Sets the limit level.

TRACE/DISPLAY Selects the active trace. Each time this key is pressed, a new active trace
is selected.

SELECT: Selects an active trace. Every time Select screen menu is


pressed, the active trace changes. Channel numbers are assigned to each
captured traces or loaded traces. Refer to “Save & Load” for procedures to
load traces.

VIEW: Hides or displays the Trace CH on the screen. Press Select screen
menu key to choose the Trace CH. Traces with View set OFF are hidden
from the screen. The information about the hidden traces is also cleared
from the information window shown on the upper right of the screen.
Setting View On restores hidden traces and information on the window.

TRACE CAPTURE: Captures a current trace on the screen and assigns a


Trace CH. Refer to “Save & Load” for procedures to save traces.

TRACE INFO: Hides or displays the trace information window on the


upper right corner of the screen. This is used to view traces overlaid with
the trace information window.

CH CLEAR TRACE: Deletes an active trace channel from the screen. The
cleared channel is not restored. It is used to select and delete a trace
11
channel one by one when multiple channels are displayed on the screen.
Verify the channels to delete with View ON/OFF function in advance
settings as cleared channels cannot be restored.

CLEAR ALL: Deletes all channels from the instrument and initialize the
trace settings.

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-9

BW/AVG SWEEP CTRL: Selects the sweep method between “Continue” and “Hold”.

MARKER Marker is used to get the information about a specific trace. A total of six
Markers can be set and each marker can be used independently. The X,
and Y coordinates of the trace are displayed when the maker is placed on
any position of the trace. As the position displaying Marker’s X and Y
coordinates may be slightly different for each measurement mode, refer to
the description of each measurement after this chapter.

SELECT: Selects an Active Marker whose position is moved by the


pressing Select key. The assigned number of an active marker is
displayed in red color on the Select screen menu and the marker’s
number is also displayed next to the marker on the trace.

MARKER VIEW: Hides or displays the selected marker on the screen. In


the same measurement mode markers appear at the previous positions
when the Marker View is turned off and on. If a measurement mode has
been changed, markers are not restored to their previous positions.

MARKER TYPE:
Selects the type of Marker to be displayed, Normal marker provide the
reading of its position and Delta marker provides the differences between
two sets of marker points.

NORMAL: Used to place a marker, along with the marker number,


1-6, on the trace.

DELTA: Delta Marker is associated with a Normal Marker, so a


Normal Maker must be set before a Delta marker is set. When a
Delta Marker is set, the position set by the Delta Marker becomes
the reference position of the Normal Marker and the Maker’s X CH
and Y values displays the difference compared with Delta Marker.
11

MARKER TABLE: Displays a table on the left side of the screen when
Marker Table is activated. All X and Y coordinates of the activated
markers are displayed on the table.

Chapter 11
11-10 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

MARKER CLEAR ALL: Turns all markers off the screen. Markers are
redisplayed on the previous position if markers are turned back on. If a
measurement mode is changed, current settings are not restored.

MARKER EDIT: Sets the marker position manually. A pop-up window


appears for users to set the frequency by entering numeric values and the
marker position is moved to the setting frequency.

PEAK SEARCH Each time Peak Search key is pressed, a marker is displayed on the
highest peak of the Trace.

PEAK RIGHT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the right of its
current position.

PEAK LEFT: Moves the marker to the next highest peak at the left of its
current position.

MAX SEARCH: Moves the marker to the highest peak of the trace.

MIN SEARCH: Moves the marker to the lowest peak of the trace.

MEASURE When the instrument is in the Cable and Antenna Analyzer


Measurement mode, a Measure key is used to select measurement
menu listed below.

 VSWR
 DTF
 One Port Loss
 Gain/Loss

CH MEASURE SETUP CALIBRATION: Performs calibration using standard O-S-L calibration kit.
The instrument must be calibrated to get a reliable measurement result.
11
For best results, set the frequency and calibrate the instrument
immediately before taking any measurement.

DATA POINTS: Sets the data points or resolution to measure the trace.
The following trace point can be selected: 126, 251, 501, 1001

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-11

VSWR
VSWR DISPLAY
VSWR DISPLAY The following figure is a screen example when VSWR measurement mode
is selected. Various kinds of information related to the VSWR
measurement are shown on the screen.

Figure 71 – VSWR Measurement Screen Display

① Calibration Info: Displays a calibration state on the measurement


frequency band that a user has selected. When the instrument is first
turned on, the state is “CAL OFF”. The symbol “CAL ON” is
displayed along with the execution time and frequency band after the
calibration is successfully completed.
② Y scale unit: It is the measurement unit of the Y-axis displayed for
the trace [Return Loss (dB), VSWR].
③ Trace Average: Indicates the average value of a single sweep over
the user setting frequency band.
④ Data Point: Sets the number of data points to take during a CH
measurement mode. The Trace Pont sets available are the following: 11
126, 251, 501, and 1001, Selecting 501 data points provides twice
as many measurement points as 251, but it takes approximately
twice as long for the trace to sweep and display.
⑤ Span: It is a user-defined frequency band. Changing the frequency
band doesn’t affect the sweep time, but affects the calibration.
Recalibration is required if the frequency setting is changed.

Chapter 11
11-12 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

⑥ TOP & BOTTOM: Display range setting information.


⑦ Freq Band Info: The band name is displayed if the band is selected
from the band list stored in the instrument. If the user sets the start,
stop, center or span frequencies manually, the band name will show
“CUSTOM”.

Selecting trace points larger than needed for the measurement


will result in longer sweep times. It is recommended to select
high resolution trace points only when measuring wide
frequency bands or a precise measurement is required. The calibration is
effective even after the trace points are changed.

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-13

SETTING Frequencies can be set manually or selected from a band list stored in the
FREQUENCY instrument. It is desirable to set the frequency to a value that covers the
normal range of the measurement with enough margins.

Action Note

Setting Center Freq and Span

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key. Hard key

2. Select the Center screen menu.  The popup to enter frequency is displayed.

3. Enter a center frequency value.

4. Press the ENTER key.

5. Select the Span screen menu.

6. Enter a span value.

7. Press the ENTER key.

Setting Start/ Stop Frequency

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key.  The current setting is cleared when a new

2. Select the Start screen menu value is entered.

3. Enter a start frequency value.  Press the ESC key to delete one by one the

4. Press the ENTER key. numbers displayed on the pop-up window.

5. Select the Stop screen menu.  Pressing the ESC key repeatedly will cancel

6. Enter a stop frequency value. the input mode.

7. Press the ENTER key.  The frequency input unit is in MHz and the

minimum input steps is 0.01MHz

Selection from the band list stored in the instrument

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key.

2. Select the Band screen menu.

3. Select the band from the list and press the

Enter key

 Press the Up/Down arrow keys or rotate the

dial knob to select a band from the list.


CH
 Select the Page Up/Down screen menu for
11
searching bands not shown in the screen.

Table 71 – Frequency Setting Procedure

Chapter 11
11-14 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Changing the frequency settings will automatically turn


calibration OFF with the indication “CAL OFF” displayed on the
screen. Always set the frequency before calibrating the instrument.
Changing the trace points during the measurement doesn’t affect the
calibration.

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-15

CALIBRATION

The instrument must be calibrated to get a reliable measurement result.


For best results, set the frequency and calibrate the instrument
immediately before taking any measurement.

 Calibration accessories (optional).


 Calibration Kit, which contains a 50 ohm load, one open standard and
one short standard.
 Test cable: Use a phase stable cable for reliable and consistent
measurement results.

To minimize measurement errors, connect the port extension


cable to the RF Out port on the instrument and then connect the
Calibration Kit to the end of the extension cable.

L
Standard
S Calibration Kit
O

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

ESC

Freq/
Trace/ System
Chan Save
Display Marker Measure

Amplitude Mode
BW/AVG Peak Measure Load
Search Setup

Figure 72 – Calibration for VSWR measurement


CH
11

Chapter 11
11-16 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

O L
Extension Cable
Standard
Calibration Kit

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

ESC

Freq/
Trace/ System
Chan Save
Display Marker Measure

Amplitude Mode
BW/AVG Peak Measure Load
Search Setup

Figure 73 – Calibration using extension cable

Bending or moving the phase unstable cable while making a


measurement may cause errors in the measurement. The test
cable used for port extension must be phase stable in the measurement
frequencies.

At the successful completion of each calibration step, a message


is displayed with a beep sound.

The above figure illustrates the connection method when a port extension
cable is used for calibration. To compensate errors caused by a port
extension cable or adapters, perform an Open-Short-Load calibration
including the port extension cable.

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-17

Action Note

Performs Calibration after the frequency setting and test cable connections.

1. Call up the Measure Setup key Hard function key

2. Press the Calibration key. Screen menu key

3. Connect an Open standard Connect CAL Kit “Open” connector to the test cable.

4. Select the Open screen menu  When the Open screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

 The message, “Open CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

5. Connect a Short standard Connect CAL Kit “Short” connector to the test cable.

6. Select the Short screen menu  When the Short screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

 The message, “Short CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

7. Connect the 50ohm load Connect CAL Kit “Load” connector to the test cable.

8. Select the Load screen menu  When the Load screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

 The message, “Load CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

Calibration state is changed to “CAL ON” after the Open-Short-Load calibration.

Table 72 – Calibration Procedure

CH
11

Chapter 11
11-18 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

MAKING VSWR MEASUREMENT

The instrument is ready to make VSWR measurements after completing


the Open-Short-Load calibration using a port extension cable.

The end of the port extension cable must be connected to the device
(antenna or feed line) for VSWR measurements as shown in the following
figure. The result of the VSWR measurement is displayed on the screen in
real time.

Figure 74 – Connection for VSWR Measurement

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-19

After calibration, do not change the connection of the port


extension cable or the frequency setting. It may cause a
measurement error.

When the frequency setting is changed, a warning alarm will


sound and the calibration state will change to “CAL OFF”. In
this case, recalibrate the instrument using the Open-Short-Load standard.

The maximum allowable input level of the instrument is +25dBm.


! Do not connect the RF Out port of the instrument directly to the
output port of the system. An over power input degrades the performance
of the instrument and may cause a malfunction of the instrument.

Do not connect the instrument to the antenna when there is a


risk of lightning. Electric shock may cause a malfunction or
damage the instrument.

SETTING TRACE Adjust a trace point to change the resolution of the VSWR measurement.
POINT Changing the Trace Point doesn’t affect the calibration state.

SCALE  Press the Amplitude key to set the maximum and minimum values on
ADJUSTMENT the Y-scale manually.
 Press the AUTO SCALE key to optimize the Y-scale and display the
entire trace.
 Press the SCALE key to select the display unit of the Y-scale.
 Scale adjustment doesn’t affect the calibration state.

USING MARKERS Depending on the measurement setting, four or six markers can be used
simultaneously. The Y-axis value on a current trace is displayed next to
each marker on the screen, but the frequency information is not provided. CH
11

Chapter 11
11-20 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Figure 75 – Using Markers in VSWR Measurement Mode

USING LIMIT LINE By setting a limit line, users can easily check if a measurement exceeds a
specified limit. It appears as a horizontal line at the value set. An alarm
sounds when a trace exceeds the limit line and the exceeded portion is
displayed in red color.

CH
11

Figure 76 – Limit Line Application

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-21

DTF
DTF Display
DTF DISPLAY The screen shown in the following figure is displayed when DTF
measurement mode is selected. The distance from the instrument is
shown in the X-axis, while the relative magnitude of the discontinuity is
shown in the Y-axis. The information related to the DTF measurement is
shown on the screen.

Figure 77 – DTF Measurement Screen Display

① Calibration Info: Displays a calibration state on the measurement


frequency band that a user has selected. When the instrument is first
turned on, the state is “CAL OFF”. The symbol “CAL ON” is
displayed along with the execution time and frequency band after the
calibration is successfully completed.
② Y scale unit: It is the measurement unit of the Y-axis displayed for
the trace [Return Loss (dB), VSWR].
③ MAX Distance: Displays the maximum measurable distance within CH
the user setting frequency band. Setting a narrow frequency band 11
will increase the measurable distance while setting a wide frequency
band will decrease the distance.
④ Data Point: Sets the number of data points to take during a
measurement mode. The Trace Pont sets available are the following:
126, 251, 501, and 1001, Selecting 501 data points provides twice
as many measurement points as 251, but it takes approximately
twice as long for the trace to sweep and display.

Chapter 11
11-22 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

⑤ Span: It is a user-defined frequency band. Changing the frequency


band doesn’t affect the sweep time, but affects the calibration.
Recalibration is required if the frequency setting is changed.
⑥ Cable Info: The name of user selected cable is displayed on the
screen. A cable name is displayed if the cable is selected from a
Cable List stored in the instrument. If the user sets the Velocity and
Cable Loss manually, the band name will show “CUSTOM”. The
following information is also displayed.

Rel. Propagation Velocity: The relative propagation velocity for


the cable type selected by the user from the Cable List or
manually set by selecting the Velocity key.

Nominal Attenuation: The loss per unit distance for the cable
type that the user selected from the Cable List or set manually by
selecting the Cable Loss key.

⑦ TOP & BOTTOM: Displays the range setting information.

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-23

DTF SETUP Sets the conditions for DTF measurements. The user setting parameters
for DTF measurements are the following:

 Frequency Setting: Sets the start and stop frequencies to make a


measurement. If a specific frequency band has been set in VSWR
measurement mode, it can be applied to DTF measurement. To
change the maximum measurement distance or increase the
measurement resolution, is necessary to change the frequency
setting.
 Distance Setting: The maximum measurable distance is displayed
on the left side of the screen depending on the frequency setting. Any
value within the maximum measurable distance can be set. Optimum
resolution is achieved when the user setting distance is the same as
the maximum measurable distance.
 Cable Setting: Selects a cable type of the feed line. By using this key,
users can select the cable stored in the instrument without setting the
detailed parameters of the cable.
 Setup: Used to change the setting of the cable parameters or change
the distance unit. It consists of the following sub menus:
 Velocity: Sets the relative propagation delay of a cable. It
affects the calculation of the distance in the DTF
measurement.
 Cable Loss: Sets the loss per distance unit of a cable. It
affects the peak level of the discontinuity in the DTF
measurement.

After calibration, do not change the connection of the port


extension cable or the frequency setting. It can cause a
measurement error. When the frequency setting is changed, a
warning alarm will sound and the calibration state will change to “CAL
OFF”. After changing the frequency setting, recalibrate the instrument CH
using the Open-Short-Load standard.
11

Chapter 11
11-24 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

A detailed procedure for DTF setup is as follows:

Action Note

Frequency Setting

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key  Additional calibration is not necessary if

 Select the Start Freq screen menu a Freq. Band has been set and a

- {Enter start frequency value} calibration has been performed for the

- Press the ENTER key band in VSWR measurement, and the

 Select the Stop Freq screen menu same Freq. band is used in the DTF

- {Enter stop frequency value} measurement.

- Press the ENTER key

Distance Setting

2. Call up the Measure Setup key  The ending point can only be set in

3. Select the Distance screen menu distance setting.

 {Enter measuring distance}  The maximum measurable distance is

 Press the ENTER key 1,250m (4,125ft).

Cable Setting

4. Select the Cable List screen menu

 [Standard]/[Custom]

- {Select a cable by using Knob or


arrow key}

 Press the ENTER key

Setup

5. Setting Relative Propagation Velocity

 Select the Velocity screen menu

 {Enter user setting value}

 Press the ENTER key

6. Setting Cable Loss

 Select the Cable Loss screen menu

 {Enter user setting value}

CH  Press the ENTER key

7. Setting the X axis Unit


11
 [Meter]/[Feet]

Table 73 – DTF Setup Procedure

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-25

CALIBRATION

The instrument must be calibrated to get a reliable measurement results.


The instrument must be calibrated to get the DTF measurement results
compatible with VSWR measurement results.

 Calibration accessories (optional)


 Calibration Kit which contains one 50 ohm load, one Open standard
and one Short standard
 Test cable: Use a phase stable cable for reliable and consistent
measurement results

L
Standard
S Calibration Kit
O

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

ESC

Freq/
Trace/ System
Chan Save
Display Marker Measure

Amplitude Mode
BW/AVG Peak Measure Load
Search Setup

Figure 78 – Calibration for DTF measurement

To minimize measurement errors, connect the port extension CH


cable to the RF Out port on the instrument and then connect the
11
Cal Kit to the end of the extension cable.

Chapter 11
11-26 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

The figure above shows the connection diagram for calibration using a test
cable. To compensate measurement errors due to the test cable or
adapters, perform the Open-Short-Load (O-S-L) calibration including the
test cable. For detailed calibration procedure, refer to the Calibration
Procedure.

Bending or moving the phase unstable cable while making a


measurement may cause errors in the measurement. The test
cable used for port extension must be phase stable in the measurement
frequencies.

At the successful completion of each calibration step, a


message is displayed with a beep sound.

Following is the calibration procedure for DTF measurement.

Action Note

Performs Calibration after the frequency setting and test cable connections.

1. Call up the Measure Setup key Hard function key

2. Press the Calibration key. Screen menu key

3. Connect an Open standard Connect CAL Kit “Open” connector to the test cable.

4. Select the Open screen menu  When the Open screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

 The message, “Open CAL Complete”, is displayed at its


completion.

5. Connect a Short standard Connect CAL Kit “Short” connector to the test cable.

6. Select the Short screen menu  When the Short screen menu is selected, a progress bar

is displayed to show the progress.

 The message, “Short CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

7. Connect the 50ohm load Connect CAL Kit “Load” connector to the test cable.
CH
8. Select the Load screen menu  When the Load screen menu is selected, a progress bar
11
is displayed to show the progress.

 The message, “Load CAL Complete”, is displayed at its

completion.

Calibration state is changed to “CAL ON” after the Open-Short-Load calibration.

Table 74 – Calibration Procedure

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-27

MAKING DTF MEASUREMENT

If a port extension cable is used to interconnect the instrument with the


transmission line, a measurement error can happen due to the sum of the
port extension cable length. By performing the O-S-L calibration at the end
of the port extension cable, the extension cable length will be
compensated and the fault location will be more accurately measured.

Figure 79 – Connection Diagram for DTF Measurement

The maximum allowable input level of the instrument is +25dBm.

! Do not connect the RF Out port directly to the system output port.
Exposure to the overpowered input may degrade the
performance of the instrument and may cause damage in the long run.

Do not connect the instrument to the antenna when there is a CH


risk of lightning. Electric shock may cause the malfunction or
11
breakdown of the instrument.

Chapter 11
11-28 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

If O-S-L calibration has been done at the end of the port


extension cable for DTF measurement, the length of the port
extension cable is compensated automatically and is not included in the
distance to the point of discontinuity.

SCALE  Press the Amplitude key to set the maximum and minimum values on
ADJUSTMENT the Y-scale manually.
 Press the AUTO SCALE key to optimize the Y-scale and display the
entire trace.
 Press the SCALE key to select the display unit of the Y-scale.
 Scale adjustment doesn’t affect the calibration state.

USING MARKERS Depending on the display settings, four or six markers can be used
simultaneously. The distance of a current marker position is displayed next
to each marker on the screen. Activate the marker table to see both the
magnitude and distance information.

CH
11
Figure 80 – Using Markers in DTF Measurement Mode

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-29

Figure 81 – DTF Measurement in VSWR scale

CH
11
Figure 82 – DTF Measurement in Return Loss scale

Chapter 11
11-30 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

USING LIMIT LINE By setting a limit line, users can easily check if a measurement exceeds a
specified limit. It appears as a horizontal line at the value set. An alarm
sounds when a trace exceeds the limit line and the exceeded portion is
displayed in red color.

Figure 83 – Using Limit Line in DTF Measurement

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-31

CABLE LOSS (ONE PORT MEASUREMENT)


Cable Loss Display
CABLE LOSS The screen shown in the following figure is displayed when Cable Loss
DISPLAY measurement mode is selected. The frequency range is shown on the X-
axis, while the power loss is shown on the Y-axis.

Figure 84 – Cable Loss Measurement Screen Display

① Calibration Info: Displays a calibration state on the measurement


frequency band that a user has selected. When the instrument is first
turned on, the state is “CAL OFF”. The symbol “CAL ON” is
displayed along with the execution time and frequency band after the
calibration is successfully completed.
② Y scale unit: It is the measurement unit of the Y-axis displayed for
the trace [Cable Loss (dB)].
③ Trace Average: Indicates the average value of a single sweep over
the user setting frequency band. CH
④ Data Point: Sets the number of data points to take during a 11
measurement mode. The Trace Pont sets available are the following:
126, 251, 501, and 1001, Selecting 501 data points provides twice
as many measurement points as 251, but it takes approximately
twice as long for the trace to sweep and display.

Chapter 11
11-32 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

⑤ Span: It is a user-defined frequency band. Changing the frequency


band doesn’t affect the sweep time, but affects the calibration.
Recalibration is required if the frequency setting is changed.
⑥ TOP & BOTTOM: Displays the range setting information.
⑦ Cable Info: The name of user selected cable is displayed on the
screen. A cable name is displayed if the cable is selected from a
Cable List stored in the instrument. If the user sets the Velocity and
Cable Loss manually, the band name will show “CUSTOM”.

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-33

SETTING The user must set the frequency band to make a Cable Loss
FREQUENCY measurement. Frequencies can be set manually or chosen from a band
list registered in the instrument.

Action Note

Setting Center Freq and Span

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN screen menu. Multi Key

2. Select the Center screen menu.  Current setting is displayed as default on the screen

3. Enter a center frequency value.

4. Press the ENTER key.

5. Select the Span screen menu.

6. Enter a span value.

7. Press the ENTER key.

Setting Start/Stop Frequency

8. Press the FREQ/CHAN key.  Current setting is cleared when a new value is

9. Select the Start screen menu entered.

10. Enter a start frequency value.  Press the ESC key to delete a number displayed on

11. Press the ENTER key. the pop-up window one by one

12. Select the Stop screen menu  Pressing the ESC repeatedly will cancel the input

13. Enter a stop frequency value. mode

14. Press the ENTER key.  Input unit is MHz and minimum input step is 0.01MHz

Selection from the band list registered in the instrument

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key.

2. Select the Band screen menu.

3. Select the band from the and then press the

Enter key  Press Up/Down arrow key or rotate the knob to select a

band from the list


 Select the Page Up/Page Down screen menu for

searching the band that doesn’t show up on the current

page.
CH
Table 75 – Frequency Setting Procedure
11

Changing the frequency settings will automatically turn


calibration OFF with the symbol “CAL OFF” to be displayed on
the screen along with an alarm sound. In this case, recalibrate the
instrument with the Open-Short-Load Calibration kit.

Chapter 11
11-34 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

CALIBRATION

The instrument must be calibrated to get reliable Cable Loss


measurement result. For best results, set the frequencies and calibrate the
instrument immediately before taking measurements.

 Calibration accessories (optional).


 Calibration kit which contains one 50 ohm load, one Open standard,
and one Short standard

To minimize measurement errors in Cable Loss measurement, do not use


unnecessary extension cables or adapters while performing calibration.
The following figure illustrates the recommended calibration method for
Cable Loss measurement.

L
Standard
S Calibration Kit
O

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

ESC

Freq/
Trace/ System
Chan Save
Display Marker Measure

Amplitude Mode
BW/AVG Peak Measure Load
Search Setup

Figure 85 – Port Calibration for One Port Cable Loss Measurement

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-35

Following is the calibration procedure for Cable Loss measurement.

Action Note

1. Call up the Measure Setup key Hard function key

2. Press the Calibration key. Screen menu key

3. Connect Open standard Connect CAL Kit “Open” connector to the RF Out

port

4. Select the Open screen menu  When the Open screen menu is selected, a

progress bar is displayed to show the progress.


 The message, “Open CAL Complete”, is

displayed at the completion.

5. Connect Short standard Connect CAL Kit “Short” connector to the RF Out

port.

6. Select the Short screen menu  When the Short screen menu is selected, a

progress bar is displayed to show the progress.


 The message, “Short CAL Complete”, is

displayed at the completion.

7. Connect 50ohm Load standard Connect CAL Kit “Load” connector to the RF

Out/Out port

8. Select the Load screen menu  When the Load screen menu is selected, a

progress bar is displayed to show the progress.

 The message, “Load CAL Complete”, is


displayed at the completion.

Calibration state is changed to “CAL ON” after Open-Short-Load calibration.

Table 76 – Port Calibration Procedure for Cable Loss Measurement

CH
11

Chapter 11
11-36 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

MAKING CABLE LOSS MEASUREMENT

The instrument is ready to perform Cable Loss measurement after


completing the Open-Short-Load calibration.

S Step #2
Connect “Short”
O
Standard
L

Step #1 O L
S
Calibration
Cable Under Test

Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

ESC

Freq/
Trace/ System
Chan Save
Display Marker Measure

Amplitude Mode
BW/AVG Peak Measure Load
Search Setup

Figure 86 – One Port Cable Loss Measurement Connection Diagram

Action Note

Make a measurement after completion of O-S-L calibration.

1. Connect the cable to measure its loss to the

RF Out port of the instrument.

2. Connect the Short standard of the Cal Kit to Cable Loss measurement result is displayed on the

the end of the cable to be tested screen.


CH Table 77 – Cable Loss Measurement Procedure
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-37

SCALE  Press the Amplitude key to set the maximum and minimum values on
ADJUSTMENT the Y-scale manually.
 Press the AUTO SCALE key to optimize the Y-scale and display the
entire trace.
 Press the TOP/BOTTOM key to set the display min/max of the Y-
scale.
 Scale adjustment doesn’t affect the normalization state.

USING MARKERS On the measurement display, six markers can be used simultaneously.
The level of a current trace is displayed next to each marker on the screen,
but the frequency information is not provided. The frequency information
will be provided when Marker Table is enabled (Marker Table On).

Figure 87 – Using Markers in Cable Loss Measurement Mode

By setting a limit line, users can easily check if a measurement exceeds a


USING LIMIT LINE CH
specified limit. It appears as a horizontal line at the value set. An alarm
11
sounds when a trace exceeds the limit line and the exceeded portion is
displayed in red color.

Chapter 11
11-38 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

Figure 88 – Using Limit Line in Cable Loss Measurement Mode

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-39

GAIN/LOSS (TWO PORTS MEASUREMENT)

Gain/Loss Display
GAIN/LOSS The screen shown in the following figure is displayed when Cable Loss
DISPLAY measurement mode is selected. The frequency range is shown on the X-
axis, while the power loss is shown on the Y-axis.

Figure 89 – Gain/Loss Measurement Screen Display

① Normalization Info: Displays a calibration state on the


measurement frequency band that a user has selected. When the
instrument is first turned on, the state is “NORM OFF”. The symbol
“NORM ON” is displayed along with the execution time and
frequency band after the normalization is successfully completed.
② Y Scale Unit: It is the measurement unit of the Y-axis displayed for
the trace either [Loss (dB)] or [Gain (dB)].
③ Data Points: Sets the number of data points to take during a
measurement mode. The Trace Pont sets available are 126 and 251, CH
selecting 251 data points provides twice as many measurement 11
points as 126, but it takes approximately twice as long for the trace
to sweep and display.
④ Span: It is a user-defined frequency band. Changing the frequency
band doesn’t affect the sweep time, but affects the calibration.
Recalibration is required if the frequency setting is changed.
⑤ TOP & BOTTOM: Displays the range setting information.

Chapter 11
11-40 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

⑥ Cable Info: The name of user selected cable is displayed on the


screen. A cable name is displayed if the cable is selected from a
Cable List stored in the instrument. If the user sets the Velocity and
Cable Loss manually, the band name will show “CUSTOM”.

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-41

SETTING The user must set the frequency band to make a Gain/ Loss measurement.
FREQUENCY Frequencies can be set manually or chosen from a band list registered in
the instrument.

Action Note

Setting Center Freq and Span

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN screen menu. Multi Key

2. Select the Center screen menu.  Current setting is displayed as default on the screen

3. Enter a center frequency value.

4. Press the ENTER key.

5. Select the Span screen menu.

6. Enter a span value.

7. Press the ENTER key.

Setting Start/Stop Frequency

8. Press the FREQ/CHAN key.  Current setting is cleared when a new value is

9. Select the Start screen menu entered.

10. Enter a start frequency value.  Press the ESC key to delete a number displayed on

11. Press the ENTER key. the pop-up window one by one

12. Select the Stop screen menu  Pressing the ESC repeatedly will cancel the input

13. Enter a stop frequency value. mode

14. Press the ENTER key.  Input unit is MHz and minimum input step is 0.01MHz

Selection from the band list registered in the instrument

1. Press the FREQ/CHAN key.

2. Select the Band screen menu.

3. Select the band from the and then press the

Enter key  Press Up/Down arrow key or rotate the knob to select a

band from the list


 Select the Page Up/Page Down screen menu for

searching the band that doesn’t show up on the current

page.
CH
Table 78 – Frequency Setting Procedure
11

Changing the frequency settings or Gain/Loss measurement will


automatically turn normalization OFF with the symbol “NORM
OFF” to be displayed on the screen along with an alarm sound. In this
case, recalibrate the instrument with the test cable.

Chapter 11
11-42 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

NORMALIZATION

The instrument must be calibrated (normalized) to get reliable Gain/Loss


measurement results. For best results, set the frequencies and normalize
the instrument immediately before taking measurements.

 Normalization requires a test Test cable which will be connected


between DUT and the instrument.

To minimize measurement errors in Gain/Loss measurement, do not use


unnecessary extension cables or adapters while performing normalization.
The following figure illustrates the recommended calibration method for
Cable Loss measurement.

Figure 90 – Two Ports Calibration for Gain/Loss Measurement

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-43

Following is the normalization procedure for Gain/Loss measurement.

Action Note

1) Call up the Measure Setup key Hard function key

2) Press the Calibration key. Screen menu key

3) Connect the Test Cable between RF In and Connect Test Cable and Press Enter.

RF Out port, then press Enter

 When the Enter is pressed, a progress bar is

displayed to show the progress.

 The message, “NORM CAL Complete”, is

displayed at the completion.

Normalization state is changed to “NORM ON” after normalizing.

Table 79 – Normalization Procedure for Gain/Loss Measurement

CH
11

Chapter 11
11-44 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

MAKING GAIN/LOSS MEASUREMENT

The instrument is now ready to perform Gain/Loss measurement after


completing the normalization.

Normalized Test
DUT Cable

RF In RF Out
Base Station Analyzer JD7105A

ESC

Freq/
Trace/ System
Chan Save
Display Marker Measure

Amplitude Mode
BW/AVG Peak Measure Load
Search Setup

Figure 91 – Two Ports Gain/Loss Measurement Diagram

The following is two port gain/loss measurement procedures.

Action Note

1) Call up the Gain/Loss menu. Screen menu key

2) Set up the frequency, Freq/Chan. Hard key

3) Press the Measure Setup key and select Hard key

Gain or Loss. Screen menu

CH 4) Perform normalizing. Screen menu

5) Measure Gain/Loss
11

Table 80 – Normalization Procedure for Gain/Loss Measurement

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-45

For Gain measurement, +30dB Attenuator required the RF Out


port to protect the instrument from the excessive RF power.
The maximum allowable input of RF In port is +30dBm.

Figure 92 – Two Ports Gain Measurement w/+30dB Attenuator

CH
11

Chapter 11
11-46 CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER

SCALE  Press the Amplitude key to set the maximum and minimum values on
ADJUSTMENT the Y-scale manually.
 Press the AUTO SCALE key to optimize the Y-scale and display the
entire trace.
 Press the TOP/BOTTOM key to set the display min/max of the Y-
scale.
 Scale adjustment doesn’t affect the normalization state.

USING MARKERS On the measurement display, six markers can be used simultaneously.
The level of a current trace is displayed next to each marker on the screen,
but the frequency information is not provided. The frequency information
will be provided when Marker Table is enabled (Marker Table On).

Figure 93 – Using Markers in Cable Loss Measurement Mode

CH
11

Chapter 11
CABLE AND ANTENNA ANALYZER 11-47

USING LIMIT LINE By setting a limit line, users can easily check if a measurement exceeds a
specified limit. It appears as a horizontal line at the value set. An alarm
sounds when a trace exceeds the limit line and the exceeded portion is
displayed in red color.

Figure 94 – Using Limit Line in Cable Loss Measurement Mode

CH
11

Chapter 11
POWER METER 12-1

12.0 POWER METER

In this chapter
Power Meter Introduction............................................................................................................................ 12-2
Using RF Power Meter ............................................................................................................................... 12-3
How to Use Keys ........................................................................................................................................ 12-4
Freq/Chan ........................................................................................................................................... 12-4
Display Overview ................................................................................................................................ 12-5
Cable Connection ............................................................................................................................... 12-6
Connecting Sensor ............................................................................................................................. 12-7
Measurement Procedure (internal) ..................................................................................................... 12-9
Making Power Measurement ...................................................................................................................... 12-9
Measurement Procedure (using external power sensors) ................................................................ 12-10
Measurement Results ........................................................................................................................12-11

CH
12

Chapter 12
12-2 POWER METER

POWER METER INTRODUCTION

The RF power measurement function of the JD7105A measures a wider


frequency range (up to 30MHz) compared to the Channel Power
Measurement. Its main application is the output measurement of an
integrated repeater.

The RF power meter of the JD7105A does not adopt conventional power
measurement techniques used on separate Power Sensors. Rather it
uses the band power measurement style based on spectrum
measurement results. Like general spectrum analyzer, measurement
accuracy may be degraded if the span is set too wide, since it limits the
display points within the measurement band. To prevent this, the JD7105A
measures RMS power from the raw data received from FFT in the defined
span, which results in an accurate power measurement independent of the
span setting, even without using a separate power sensor.

Also the JD7105A provides a logging function for measured power on the
screen to track variations. This function provides an accurate estimation of
BTS in operation where the output may continuously fluctuate.

CH
12

Chapter 12
POWER METER 12-3

USING RF POWER METER

The Power Meter measures the transmission power of the system. For
radio output power measurements it is required the use of optional
external power sensors. Two kinds of power sensors are available,
directional and terminating; their application depends on the type of power
measurement to be performed, in-service (directional) or out-of-service
(terminating).

CH
12

Chapter 12
12-4 POWER METER

HOW TO USE KEYS

This section describes the use of the keys in Power Meter mode. All
hard keys except Measure, Save, Load, System, Mode will be deactivated.

Menus for setting required parameters will be provided in Screen menu.


The following describes how to use screen menu keys in Cable and
Antenna Analyzer mode.
Freq/Chan
FREQ/CHAN FREQUENCY: Sets the Frequency to be measured. Values can be
entered with the Data Entry key

CENTER FREQUENCY: Changes the center frequency.

SPAN: Sets the frequency range over which the instrument will
sweep.

START FREQUENCY: Changes the Start frequency

STOP FREQUENCY: Changes the Stop frequency.

CH
12

Chapter 12
POWER METER 12-5

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW

Figure 95 – Power Meter Screen

① Start/Stop Frequency Information


② Display Range (Min/Max) Setting Information
③ High/Low Limit Indication Setting Information
④ User offset (Input Loss) Setting Information
⑤ Measurement Result Display Screen (dBm and Watt)
⑥ Power Min/Max Value Display Screen
⑦ Display Mode Information (Absolute or Relative)
⑧ Pass/Fail Indicator

CH
12

Chapter 12
12-6 POWER METER

CABLE
Attenuator
CONNECTION
HPA
(Using Internal Power or BTS
LPA

Sensor)
! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
N-N Cable DISCHARGE

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


Figure 96 – Connection Diagram (Direct Connection)

To
Antenna

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer


! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
OUT
Directional IN or BTS
Coupler LPA
-50 dB

Figure 97 – Connection Diagram (Indirect Connection)

CH
12

Chapter 12
POWER METER 12-7

CONNECTING Measuring transmission power of the system can be done either directly
SENSOR from the instrument or with optional external power sensors. There are two
(Using Optional Power kinds of power sensors, directional or terminating power sensors, their
Sensor) application depend on the type of transmission power signal to be
measured.

Part No Description Frequency Range Power Range

Average: +21.76 ~ +51.76dBm

(0.15 ~ 150W)
JD731A Directional Power Sensor 300 ~ 3800MHz
Peak: +36.02 ~ +56.02dBm

(4 ~ 400W)

JD732A Terminating Power Sensor 20 ~ 3800MHz Average: -30 ~ +20dBm

(1uW ~ 100mW)

JD733A Directional Power Sensor 150 ~ 3500MHz +24dBm ~ 43dBm (0.25W ~ 20W)

JD724A- Average Power Sensor 20 ~ 3000MHz 0 ~ -30dBm

50551 (Terminating type)

JD724A- Peak Power Sensor 20 ~ 4000MHz 0 ~ -40dBm

50552 (Terminating type)

Table 81 – Types of Power Sensors


JD732A

USB
From BTS

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC
DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

JD7105A Base Station Analyzer

Figure 98 – Power Sensor Connection (Terminating Type)

CH
12

Chapter 12
12-8 POWER METER

Figure 99 – Power Sensor Connection (Directional Type)

After the power sensor connection and initialization, connect the power
sensor to the output port to be measured.

CH
12

Chapter 12
POWER METER 12-9

MAKING POWER MEASUREMENT

Measurement The following procedure is for the case using internal power meter, without
Procedure (internal) external power sensors.

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

To
Antenna
Attenuator
HPA
or BTS
LPA

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
+25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
AVOID STATIC DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

N-N Cable DISCHARGE External In

Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V E1/T1 GPS Sync Ref

RF In RF Out
! CAUTION ! CAUTION
+30dBm MAX +25dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC AVOID STATIC

G C 7105A B as e S tation A nalyzer


DISCHARGE DISCHARGE

External In

! CAUTION
Serial USB LAN DC 15~19V Sync Ref
E1/T1 GPS +30dBm MAX
AVOID STATIC
EQP
DISCHARGE
-50 dB

HPA
Directional
G C 7105A B as e S tation A nalyzer OUT IN or BTS
Coupler LPA
-50 dB

[Mode] Selects Power Meter Mode

[Power Meter] / {Internal} Selects Internal Power Measurement

[Measure Setup] Sets Frequency to be measured

[Frequency] Sets Center Frequency

{Center Freq} Sets Span

{Span] Sets Start Frequency

{Start Freq} Sets Stop Frequency

{Stop Freq}

[Display Setup] Measurement Display Setting

[Display] {Abs/Rel} Display method setting

[Set Ref] Set current value as reference

[Display Max] Display range

[Display Min] Display range

[External Offset] External offset

[Limit Setup] {On/Off} Measurement Setting

[Low Limit] High/Low Limit Setting

[High Limit]

[Reset] Reset the power meter measurement

Table 82 – Power Measurement Procedure w/ Internal Power Meter


CH
12

Chapter 12
12-10 POWER METER

Measurement When you use external power sensors, JD731A, JD732A, JD733A, then
Procedure (using you need to initialize power sensors before measurement. The following
external power procedure describes the procedure.
sensors)

Menu Description

Connect RF In port of the JD7105A to the RF Output port of BTS.

[Mode] Selects Power Meter Mode

[Power Meter] / {external} Selects External Power Sensor Measurement

[Measure Setup] Sets Frequency to be measured

[Initialize] Initialize the power sensor, when initializing

completed, the sensor model number on the top of

the screen.

[Frequency] Sets Center Frequency

{Center Freq} Sets Span

{Span] Sets Start Frequency

{Start Freq} Sets Stop Frequency

{Stop Freq}

[Display Setup] Measurement Display Setting

[Display] {Abs/Rel} Display method setting

[Set Ref] Set current value as reference

[Display Max] Display range

[Display Min] Display range

[External Offset] External offset

[Limit Setup] {On/Off} Measurement Setting

[Low Limit] High/Low Limit Setting

[High Limit]
CH
[Reset] Reset the power meter measurement
12
[Mode] {Avg/Peak/VSWR} Power sensor measurement type, this menu only

valid for directional power sensor is connected

Table 83 – RF Power Measurement Using External Power Sensor

Chapter 12
POWER METER 12-11

Measurement Besides the advantage of measuring and understanding the trends of the
Results system output in operation where output power constantly varies based on
the amount of calls being processed by the BTS or Repeater, the
advantage of the Log graph is to easily examine the discontinuance of
output power caused by the transmission problems or defective
connection.

Figure 100 – RF Power Meter Measurement Results (Abs)

CH
12

Chapter 12
12-12 POWER METER

Figure 101 – RF Power Meter Measurement Results (Rel)

CH
12

Chapter 12
E1 ANALYZER 13-1

13.0 E1 ANALYZER

In this chapter
E1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................... 13-2
E1 Standard ........................................................................................................................................ 13-3
G.703/G.704 Framing .......................................................................................................................... 13-3
E1 Frame Structure............................................................................................................................. 13-4
E1 vs. T1............................................................................................................................................. 13-4
E1 Pulse ............................................................................................................................................. 13-5
E1 Physicals ....................................................................................................................................... 13-6
Framing .............................................................................................................................................. 13-7
Line Code ........................................................................................................................................... 13-7
CRC-4 Error Detection........................................................................................................................ 13-8
Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 13-9
Using E1 Analyzer .....................................................................................................................................13-11
How to Use Keys ...................................................................................................................................... 13-12
Measure ............................................................................................................................................ 13-12
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................. 13-12
Display Overview .............................................................................................................................. 13-14
Measurement Setup ................................................................................................................................. 13-15
Connection Diagram ......................................................................................................................... 13-16
Terminate Mode ................................................................................................................................ 13-17
Bridge Mode ..................................................................................................................................... 13-17
Monitor Mode .................................................................................................................................... 13-17
Loop Test .......................................................................................................................................... 13-17

CH
13

Chapter 13
13-2 E1 ANALYZER

E1 INTRODUCTION

The European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications


Administrations (CEPT) originally standardized the E-carrier system, which
revised and improved the earlier American T-carrier technology, and this
has now been adopted by the International Telecommunication Union
Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T).

The E-carrier standards form part of the Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy


(PDH) where groups of E1 circuits may be bundled onto higher capacity
links between telephone exchanges or countries. This allows a network
operator to provide a private end-to-end E1 circuit between customers in
different countries that share single high capacity links in between.

Physically E1 is transmitted as 32 timeslots, but one is used for framing


and typically one allocated for signaling call setup and tear down. Unlike
Internet data services, E-carrier systems permanently allocate capacity for
a voice call for its entire duration. This ensures high call quality because
the transmission arrives with the same short delay (Latency) and capacity
at all times.

CH
13

Chapter 13
E1 ANALYZER 13-3

E1 STANDARD The International CCITT framing format is adopted by most countries


(Europe, Central/South America, etc.). These facilities operate at 2.048
MBPS.

 G.704: Synchronous Frame Structure


 Used and Primary and Secondary
 Hierarchical Levels
 G.732: Characteristics of Primary PCM
 Multiplex Equipment Operating at
 2048 KBPS.

G.703/G.704 An E1 link operates over two separate sets of wires, usually twisted pair
FRAMING cable. A nominal 2.4 Volt signal is encoded with pulses using a method
that avoids long periods without polarity changes. The line data rate is
2.048Mbit/s (full duplex, i.e. 2.048Mbit/s downstream and 2.048Mbit/s
upstream) which is split into 32 timeslots, each being allocated 8 bits in
turn. Thus each timeslot sends and receives an 8-bit sample 8000 times
per second (8x8000x32 = 2,048,000). This is ideal for voice telephone
calls where the voice is sampled into an 8 bit number at that data rate and
reconstructed at the other end.

One timeslot (TS1) is reserved for framing purposes, and alternately


transmits a fixed pattern. This allows the receiver to lock onto the start of
each frame and match up each channel in turn. The standards allow for a
full Cyclic Redundancy Check to be performed across all bits transmitted
in each frame, to detect if the circuit is losing bits (information), but this is
not always used.

One timeslot (TS16) is often reserved for signaling purposes, to control


call setup and teardown according to one of several standard
telecommunications protocols. This includes Channel Associated
Signaling (CAS) where a set of bits is used to replicate opening and
closing the circuit (as if picking up the telephone receiver and pulsing
digits on a rotary phone), or using tone signaling which is passed through
on the voice circuits themselves. More recent systems used Common
Channel Signaling (CCS) such as ISDN or Signaling System 7 (SS7)
which send short encoded messages with more information about the call
including caller ID, type of transmission required etc.
CH
13

Chapter 13
13-4 E1 ANALYZER

Unlike the earlier T-carrier systems developed in North America, all 8 bits
of each timeslot are available for each call. This allows the E1 systems to
be used for circuit switch data calls, without the risk of losing information.

While the original CEPT standard G.703 specifies several options for the
physical transmission, almost exclusively the HDB3 format is used.

E1 FRAME Time Slots

STRUCTURE
0 1 2 3 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31

TS1 ~ TS15, 15 Channels TS17 ~ TS31, 15 Channels


TS0, Synchronization TS16, Signaling

Figure 102 – E1 Frame Structure

32 Timeslots in Total
 Each channel holds 8 Bits
 Each channel repeats 64,000 times a second (64 Kbps)
 30 Timeslots for voice calls
 Two Special Timeslots
 TS0: Framing and Synchronization
 TS16: Signaling

E1 VS. T1
US Standard International Standard

T1 E1

Trunk Speed 1.544 MBPS 2.048 MBPS

DS-1 Framing D4 193 bits G.704 256 bits

Line Coding Alternate Mark G.703 HDB3


Inversion
Number of DS 0 24 30

Signaling In-band or Robbed bit Out-band

Table 84 – E1 vs. T1

CH
13

Chapter 13
E1 ANALYZER 13-5

E1 PULSE The quality of the E1 pulse is an important factor for clear transmission.
 The ITU-T G.703 standard defines the max and min values in the form
of a mask. A good E1 pulse must fit inside this mask.

269ns
(244+25)

20%
10% 10%
V=100%
194ns
(244-50)

20%
Nominal pulse

V=50%

244ns

219ns
(244-25)

10% 10%
10%

V=0%
10%

20%

488ns
(244+244)

Figure 103 – Mask of the Pulse at 2.048 Mbps Interface

A G.703-compliant pulse-shaped 2 Mbit/s signal, when transported via


metallic cable of correct impedance and prescribed length, will not distort
beyond the design limits of the receive ports of the network elements.
Otherwise, the resultant errors will lead to degraded service to customers
and unnecessary repair costs for service providers.

The pulse shape can provide an excellent qualitative indication of both


noise and jitter. Averaging tends to smooth the noise riding on the signal. If
jitter is present, the rising and falling edges will be seen as scattered along
the time axis. Digital measurement of the pulse width, rise and fall times,
and over/undershoot values will give additional information on the possible
sources of distortion.
CH
13

Chapter 13
13-6 E1 ANALYZER

 Also See Table below for the specifications for an E1 pulse, as


specified in ITU-T G.703.

Table 85 – ITU-T G.703 2.048 Mbps Pulse Mask Specifications

The 2.048 Mbit/s stream is the basic building block for the transmission of
signals in the PCM digital hierarchy. Proper inter-networking of equipment
along that signal path requires strict compliance with various standards
such as ITU-T G.703, and G.704.

Output signals from such network elements as multiplexers, regenerators,


switches and PBX must be within the defined limits. The input circuitry of
the network elements must be able to compensate for any attenuation or
distortion caused by the transmission media. Then the logic 1s and 0s will
be detected correctly; otherwise, bit/code errors will result.

E1 PHYSICALS There are two types of physical delivery in E1.

 Unbalanced 120Ω
 Copper delivery on 4 wires
 One pair for Rx (1+2), and one pair for Tx (4+5)
 Balanced 75Ω
 Coax with BNC connectors
 One cable for Rx, and one cable for Tx

CH
13

Chapter 13
E1 ANALYZER 13-7

FRAMING Framing is necessary so any equipment receiving the E1 signal can


synchronize, identify, and extract the individual channels.
 2M transmission utilizes two main types of framing:
 Frame Alignment Signal (FAS)
 Multi-Frame Alignment Signal (MFAS)
 PCM-30 transmission systems use MFAS framing along with FAS
framing
 In PCM-30 timeslots 1 through 15 correspond to channels 1
through 15, and timeslots 17 through 31 correspond to channels
16 through 30.
 Timeslot 16 is used for the multi-frame alignment and Channel
Associated Signaling (CAS)
 PCM-31 transmission systems use only FAS framing
 In PCM-31 framing, timeslots 1 through 31 correspond to
channels 1 through 31.
 Fractional E1 is not offered with unframed signals, because framing is
required to determine the location of timeslots.

LINE CODE Two types of line coding are used in a typical E1 2.048 Mbit/s network:
AMI and HDB3.

AMI line coding (Alternate Mark Inversion)


AMI is used to represent successive 1s’ values in a bitstream with
alternating positive and negative pulses to eliminate any DC offset. AMI is
not used in most 2.048 Mbit/s transmission because synchronization loss
may occur during long strings of zeros as there are no pulses.

HDB3 line coding (High Density Bipolar 3)


High Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) line coding is used for transmission of 2
Mbps for two key reasons:

 The HDB3 coded signal is DC-free. Therefore, the signal can be


transmitted through balanced transformers’ coupled circuits.
 The clock recovery circuits of the receivers can operate well, even
though the data contains long strings of zeros.

CH
13

Chapter 13
13-8 E1 ANALYZER

No more than three consecutive zeroes are permitted. The AMI (Alternate
Mark Inversion) rule is violated intentionally whenever 4 or more zeros are
encountered. The 4 zeros are substituted in one of the two ways
described and illustrated below. Which method is used is governed by the
polarity of the last inserted violation pulse (V) and whether the number of
pulses between the previous violation pulse and the next one is odd or
even.

 If there is an odd number of pulses between the last violation pulse V


and the next V to be inserted, the 0000 is substituted with 000V. The
polarity of the inserted V bit is the same as that of the pulse
immediately preceding it. The polarity of this V is opposite to that of
the previous V.
 If there is an even number of pulses between the last violation V and
the next V, the 0000 is substituted with B00V. B (Bipolar pulse) is
inserted in the place of the first zero and its polarity is opposite to that
of the pulse immediately preceding it. The polarity of the inserted V is
the same as that of B and opposite to that of the previous V.

AMI

HDB3

V
Previous V

Figure 104 – AMI & HDB3 Line Coding

CRC-4 ERROR The CRC-4 function specified in ITU-T Rec. G.704 allows evaluating the
DETECTION quality of transmission over E1 links. When the CRC-4 option is enabled,
frames are arbitrarily grouped in groups of 16 (these groups are called
CRC-4 multi-frames).

A CRC-4 multi-frame always starts with a frame that carries the frame
alignment signal. The CRC-4 multi-frame structure is identified by a six-bit
CH
CRC-4 multi-frame alignment signal, which is multiplexed into bit 1 of
13

Chapter 13
E1 ANALYZER 13-9

timeslot 0 of each odd-numbered (1, 3, 5, etc.) frame of the CRC-4 multi-


frame, up to frame 11 of the multi-frame. Each CRC-4 multi-frame is
divided into two sub-multiframes of 8 frames (2048 bits) each.

The detection of errors is achieved by calculating a four-bit checksum on


each 2048-bit block (sub-multiframe). The four checksum bits calculated
on a given sub-multiframe are multiplexed, bit by bit, in bit 1 of timeslot 0
of each even-numbered frame of the next sub-multiframe.

At the receiving end, the checksum is calculated again on each sub-


multiframe and then compared against the original checksum (sent by the
transmitting end in the next sub-multiframe). The results are reported by
two bits multiplexed in bit 1 of timeslot 0 in frames 13, 15 of the CRC-4
multiframe, respectively. Errors are counted and used to prepare statistic
data on transmission performance.

ALARMS E1 Signal LOS (Loss Of Signal)


The E1 Signal Loss alarm is defined as the absence of “marks” in the
incoming data – poor or no received signal level. When the E1 Signal LOS
is active, Frame Sync and Pattern Sync alarms may also be active. The
LOS condition occurs when no pulses have been detected on the line for
between 100 to 250 bit times. This is the highest state alarm where
nothing is detected on the line. The LOS may occur when a cable is not
plugged in or the far end equipment, which is the source of the signal, is
out of service.

Frame Sync
The Frame Sync alarm is declared when the LFA condition, also called an
out-of-frame (OOF) condition occur when there are errors in the incoming
framing pattern. The number of bit errors that provokes the condition
depends on the framing format.

Pattern Sync
The Loss of Pattern Sync alarm is specific to BER test equipment, and it
may only be observed on test equipment when performing out-of-service
testing. Pattern sync losses occur under conditions of significant bit errors,
and may be caused by poor received signal level due to faulty network
elements, or by one side bad of the connection pair, or line frequency
CH
13

Chapter 13
13-10 E1 ANALYZER

HDB3 (High Density Bipolar 3)


A HDB3 pulse pattern was detected on the incoming signal at the receive
port. Note that only certain patterns transmit HDB3 pulse patterns. The
pattern must contain at least 4 consecutive zeroes before a HDB3 pattern
is sent.

FAS RAI (Frame Alignment Signal)


Loss of frame alignment (also called loss of synchronization). This
condition is declared when too many errors are reported in the frame
alignment signal (FAS), e.g., when 3 or 4 FAS errors are detected in the
last 5 frames. Loss of frame alignment is cleared after no FAS errors are
detected in two consecutive frames.

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)


The AIS signal is an unframed “all-ones” signal, and is used to maintain
line signal synchronization in case of loss of input signal, e.g., because an
alarm condition occurred in the equipment that supply the line signal. Note
that the equipment receiving an AIS signal loses frame synchronization.

CRC Error
A Cyclic Redundancy Check-4 (CRC-4) is often used in 2M transmission
to identify possible bit errors during in-service error monitoring.

 CRC-4 is a checksum calculation which allows for the detection of


errors within the 2.048Mbit/s signal while it is in service. A discrepancy
indicates at least one bit error in the received signal.

CRC-4 error checking provides a most convenient method of identifying bit


errors within an in-service system, but provides only an approximate
measure of the circuit's true performance.

CH
13

Chapter 13
E1 ANALYZER 13-11

USING E1 ANALYZER

A portable test instrument, JD7105A, can be a useful tool to check the


overall health of the transmission system, and assist in locating the source
of problems or defects. At the physical layer, the parameters of interest are
bit rate (and its stability), jitter, wander, level, noise, code errors and pulse
shape distortion. A key test in this area is to verify that the signal pulse
shape conforms to the ITU-T G.703 recommendation.

CH
13

Chapter 13
13-12 E1 ANALYZER

HOW TO USE KEYS

In this section describes hard key usages in E1 Analyzer measurement.


Keys are not listed in here will not be used.
Measure
MEASURE MEASURE OFF: Activates E1 Analyzer Measurement mode or return to
main menu of E1/T1 Analyzer.
BERT: Sets the measurement parameters of BER testing.
EVENT LOG: Enable or disable event logging functionality of E1 Analyzer.
Measure Setup
MEASURE SETUP RX INPUT: Selects the receive inputs.
Terminate: The transmitter sends data according to the
transmitter settings in the Measure Setup menu, including
framing, line-code, and BER patterns. Terminate mode provides a
nominal 120ohm input impedance.
Bridge: Bridge mode provides greater than 1kohms input
impedance for in-service monitoring, bridging the receiver input
across lines that are terminated elsewhere in the network.
Monitor: The monitor mode is designed for in-service monitoring
of E1 lines. In monitor mode, the instrument is set for 120ohms
nominal input impedance.

FRAMING: Selects the types of framing. If the Framing type of received


signal is not accord with receiver setting, then Framing alarm occurs.
PCM-30: In PCM-30 timeslots 1 through 15 correspond to
channels 1 through 15, and timeslots 17 through 31 correspond
to channels 16 through 30. Timeslot 16 is used for the multi-
frame alignment and Channel Associated Signaling (CAS)
PCM-31: In PCM-31 framing, timeslots 1 through 31 correspond
to channels 1 through 31.

LINE CODE: Selects the types of line codes to send E1 signal.


AMI: Alternate Mark Inversion, A line code uses a three level
signals to convey binary digits in which successive binary ones
(“marks” or pulses) are of alternating polarity, either positive or
negative, equal in amplitude. A binary zero (“space”) is
transmitted as no pulse, or zero amplitude.
CH
HDB3: High Density Bipolar Order 3 Encoding. It is a bipolar
13

Chapter 13
E1 ANALYZER 13-13

signaling technique (using both positive and negative pulses) based on


Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI). Extends AMI by inserting violation codes
whenever there is a run of 4 or more zeros.

PATTERN: Selects the types of patterns.


Off: No patterns are sent.
1-4: A four-bit pattern that contains a single one. Used to test
clock recovery.
1-8: An eight-bit pattern that contains a single one. Used to test
clock recovery.
All 1's: A pattern that causes line drivers to consume the
maximum power.
All 0's: A pattern that is often selected to verify HDB3
provisioning. Circuit will drop if optioned for AMI.
Alternate: A pattern that alternates between ones and zeroes.

CRC-4: Activate and Deactivate CRC-4. A method used to detect errors in


blocks of data transmitted across communication links. The detection is
determined by a formula applied at both the transmit and receive ends. E1
uses a 4 bit CRC (CRC-4) for error checking.

TX CLOCK: Selects the clock source to measure frequency and timing.


Int: Internal clock uses an internal oscillator, in case of external
reference is not available, the instrument does not transmit signal
to synchronized equipment, the instrument provides the clock to
the unit under test and most cases in Loopback test mode.
Rx: Transmit clock uses the frequency recovered from the
received signal (Network Loop), if accurate frequency
measurement is needed.

TX LBO (Transmit Line Build Out): Selects the line build out level.
Possible values for LBO are 0 dB, -6 dB.

CH
13

Chapter 13
13-14 E1 ANALYZER

DISPLAY
OVERVIEW

Figure 105 – E1 Analyzer Screen

① Rx Mode: Current test modes setting information, Terminate, Bridge


and Monitor
② Framing: Framing modes setting information, PCM-30 and PCM-31
③ Line Code: Two different line coding formats are used in T1 networks,
AMI and B8ZS
④ Tx Clock: Tx Clock setting information, Internal and Rx
⑤ Tx Pattern: Selected Tx Patter information
Off, 1-8, 1-16, All 1’s, All 0’s, Alternate, 3-24, QRSS, 2e23, 2e15,
2e23 INV, 2e15 INV
⑥ Tx LBO: Line Build Out level setting information, 0dB, -7.5dB, and
-15dB
⑦ Loop Mode: Current loop modes information, CSU and NIU
⑧ Measure On/Off: Measure on/off selection menu
⑨ BERT: Bit Error Rate Testing setting menu, user can set the following
setups
Tx Signal, Error Set, Error Injection, Alarm on/off (AIS, RAI Alarm),
and Clear History
⑩ Event Log On/Off: Activate and Deactivate Event logging capability

CH
13

Chapter 13
E1 ANALYZER 13-15

Measurement Setup The following is the basic settings and procedure for T1 analysis.

Menu Description

Mode

[Mode]

{E1/T1} {E1} Select E1 Analyzer Mode

BERT setup Set up BERT testing parameters

{BERT} Select BERT

{TX Signal}/{On/Off} Tx signal on/off

{Error Set}/{1E-5/1E-6/1E-7 or 1} Sets the Error injection

{Clear History} Clear previous alarm history

Measure Setup Measurement Setting

[Measure Setup] Select Measure Setup

{RX Input} Select Rx Input mode

{Terminate/Bridge/Monitor/Loop}

{Framing} Select Framing type

{PCM-30/PCM-31}

{Line Code} Select Line Code

{AMI/HDB3}

{Pattern} Select Stress Pattern

{Off/1-4/1-8/All 1’s/All 0’s and Alternate}

{CRC-4} Set CRC-4

{Off/On}

{TX Clock} Select the timing source

{Int/Rx}

{TX LBO} Select the Tx Line Build Out Level

{0dB/-7.5dB/-15dB}

Table 86 – E1 Analysis Procedure

CH
13

Chapter 13
13-16 E1 ANALYZER

Connection Diagram

Out-of-service Testing
Point-to-point

Loop back
GenComm GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

ES
C

Tx
NE NE
+/ De

Rx
.
- l

7 8 9

Fr Tr
eq ac Me Sy 4 5 6
/ e/ Ma Sa ste
as
Ch Di rk ve m
ur
Me
an spl er
Pe e 1 2 3
Am B
ay as
ak Mo
plitu W/ ur Lo
Se de
de AV e ad En
G arc Se 0 ter
h tu
p

Error Injection & Measurement


GenComm GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

ES
Error
Injection
C

Tx Rx
NE
+/ De

Rx
.

Tx
- l

7 8 9

Fr Tr
eq ac Me Sy 4 5 6
/ e/ Ma Sa ste
as
Ch Di rk ve m
ur
Me
an spl er
Pe e 1 2 3
Am B
ay as
ak Mo
plitu W/ ur Lo
Se de
de AV e ad En
G arc Se 0 ter
h tu

Error
p

Measurement

In-service Monitoring

Figure 106 – Typical Connection Diagram for T1 Analysis

CH
13

Chapter 13
E1 ANALYZER 13-17

Terminate Mode The Terminate mode is used when you wish to send and receive an E1
signal. The instrument terminates the received signal with a low
impedance termination, and requires that the circuit be disrupted for
testing.

Bridge Mode The Bridge mode is similar to the Monitor mode. However, in the Bridge
mode, the instrument applies high impedance isolation resistors to the
circuit under test. This isolation circuitry will protect the signal from any
possible disruption. There is no need to plug into the TX jack of the test
set while in the BRIDGE mode, and there is no need to specify a test
pattern to be transmitted. However, the transmitter in the test set is
sending the selected test pattern, framing, coding, and CRC.

Monitor Mode The Monitor (protected monitoring point) mode is used when a monitor
access is to be made. The network element has isolated the MON signal
from the live signal with high impedance resistors.

The Monitor mode is useful because it protects the live signal from any
possible disruptions caused by the testing process. It allows the technician
to observe the line while the customer is actually using it and to see if
there are any problems.

Loop Test The Loop mode is used to terminate a signal and loop it through the
instrument. The incoming Rx signal is terminated, regenerated, and
retransmitted through the Tx connector. Code violations and frame errors
are eliminated in this loopback. This mode is similar to the Terminate
mode, but the instrument loops the signal internally instead of transmitting
the selected test pattern. There are two main applications for the Loop test,
used to loop a signal back to the direction which it came from. This is
normally done if the circuit is out of service. In the other application, one
direction of a live circuit is passed through the instrument in the Loop
mode.

CH
13

Chapter 13
T1 ANALYZER 14-1

CH
14
14.0 T1 ANALYZER

In this chapter
T1 Introduction............................................................................................................................................ 14-2
T1 Bandwidth ...................................................................................................................................... 14-3
T1 Framing ......................................................................................................................................... 14-3
Line Code ........................................................................................................................................... 14-4
Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 14-6
Physical Interface ............................................................................................................................... 14-8
Using T1 Analyzer....................................................................................................................................... 14-9
How to Use Keys ...................................................................................................................................... 14-10
Measure ............................................................................................................................................ 14-10
Measure Setup ................................................................................................................................. 14-10
Display Overview .............................................................................................................................. 14-13
Measurement Setup ................................................................................................................................. 14-14
Connection Diagram ................................................................................................................................. 14-15
Terminate Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 14-16
Bridge Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 14-16
Monitor Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 14-16
Loop Test .................................................................................................................................................. 14-16

Chapter 14
14-2 T1 ANALYZER

CH
T1 INTRODUCTION
14

The T1 is what telephone companies have traditionally used to transport


digitized telephone conversations between central offices. As early as the
1960’s, a single T1 circuit made it possible for a telephone company to
deliver 24 high quality voice conversations. Since a T1 is a fully digital
service, there was no possibility of crosstalk, which is common in analog
carrier networks where copper pairs pickup emissions from neighboring
pairs. Significant increases in noise immunity were also achieved by
adopting this new digital transmission standard.

Since the early 1980’s, T1 service has been available to private industry
throughout the country. This document will discuss the various types of T1
measurement items, how to measure them, and understand the general
guidelines of T1 analysis using the JD7105A, Base Station Analyzer.

Chapter 14
T1 ANALYZER 14-3

CH
T1 BANDWIDTH The bandwidth of a T1 is commonly known to be 1.544Mbps. This
represents the maximum bit carrying ability of a T1. The overhead 14
necessary to frame a T1 is 8kbps. Therefore, the total usable bandwidth is
1.536Mbps, or the equivalent of 24 DS-0 channels. A single DS-0 has a
bandwidth of 64kbps and is designed to carry a digitized telephone call.
Today, T1 technology is being used in private and public networks to carry
both voice and data traffic.

8Kbps Overhead

DS-0 #1 64Kbps

.
1.544Mbps
.
. 1.536Mbps
.

DS-0 #24 64Kbps

*) 24 64Kbps DS-0 Channels provide 1.536Mbps in usable bandwidth


**) Total bandwidth = 1.536Mbps + 8Kbps (Overhead) = 1.544Mbps

Figure 107 – T1 Bandwidth

T1 FRAMING A T1 is framed to provide 24 logical 64kbps channels (channels are


referred to as a DS-0). Each channel is designed to carry a single digitized
telephone call. Since telephone calls are digitized at a rate of 64kbps, we
can send a call over a single DS-0. Therefore, a T1 provides 24 X 64kbps
in usable bandwidth. This equates to 1.536Mbps. The total bandwidth of a
T1 is actually 1.544Mbps, which includes 8kbps in overhead.

T1 framing is necessary to provide a common data format and to provide


a means for synchronization on a network. There are three common
framing standards currently in use. D4 framing (Super Frame, SF) is the
principal framing method that was initially used with T1 networks. D4
describes a frame made up of 24 one byte samples from each of the 24
DS-0s (192 bits). A single framing bit is sent in front of every 192 bit
structure ([24 X 8] + 1 = 193 bits per frame).

Extended Super Frame (ESF) is a newer framing method used on T1s. It


uses fewer framing bits than D4 and provides a means for gathering
performance data from the T1.

Chapter 14
14-4 T1 ANALYZER

CH
SLC-96 is a framing format introduced by AT&T and later standardized by
14
Bellcore in TR-TSY-000008, Digital Interface between the SLC 96 Digital
Loop Carrier System and a Local Digital Switch. The framing is used on
AT&T's old SLC-96 product line. The framing supports a broad variety of
maintenance functions such as alarm transmission, automatic switching to
protection line, and far end loop back. SLC-96 framing is used on the DS1
link in between the central office terminal and the remote terminal.

12 consecutive
Framing Bit 192 Bits (24 x 1Byte) Framing Bit 192 Bits (24 x 1Byte) frames create a
single D4 Super
Frame (SF)

Frame 1 Frame 2

Figure 108 – D4 Frame Format

Two line codes are supported for T1 transmissions; Alternate Mark


LINE CODE
Inversion (AMI) and Binary 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS). Although line code
is not directly associated with T1 framing, the following is generally true:

 SF D4 usually uses AMI line coding


 ESF usually uses B8ZS line coding

AMI line coding


When used on a T-carrier, the code is known as Alternate Mark Inversion
because, in this context, a binary 1 is referred to as a "mark", while a
binary 0 is called a "space". The coding was used extensively in first-
generation PCM networks, and is still commonly seen on older
multiplexing equipment today, but successful transmission relies on no
long runs of zeroes being present. No more than 15 consecutive zeros
should ever be sent to ensure synchronization. The modification of bit 7
causes a change to voice that is undetectable by the human ear, but it is
an unacceptable corruption of a data stream. Data channels are required
to use some other form of pulse-stuffing, such as always setting bit 8 to 1,
in order to maintain one's density. Of course, this lowers the effective data
throughput to 56kbit/s per channel.

Chapter 14
T1 ANALYZER 14-5

CH
14

Figure 109 – AMI Encoding

B8ZS line coding


B8ZS is an abbreviation for Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution (or Binary
Eight Zero Substitution)- which is a method of line coding used in the T-
carrier system which allows full 64kbits per second per channel.

On a T1, ones are sent by applying voltage to the wire, where a zero is
sent by having no voltage on the wire. Sending excessive zeros in a row
could cause receiving equipment to lose synchronization, so it is important
that such a pattern not be sent.

The original standard of line coding, AMI Alternate Mark Inversion,


specifies that there are three states of the line, no voltage is a zero,
positive voltage is a one (or mark), and negative voltage is also a one (or
mark). Because of the inversion of the voltage for each "mark," or one,
sent, the receiving equipment can easily determine the data rate of the
line and not lose synchronization.

Table 87 – B8ZS Encoding

For the B8ZS scheme, any time eight consecutive zeros are detected in
the data stream to be transmitted, the transmitter "substitutes" a fixed
pattern of ones, zeros, and BPVs in place of those 8 zeros. This is a very
specific pattern; each block of eight consecutive zeros is replaced with
000VB0VB, where B represents and inserted "1" bit, and V represents an
inserted "1" that is a bipolar violation.

Chapter 14
14-6 T1 ANALYZER

CH
The terminating receivers can recognize this pattern and re-substitute the
14
original string of 8 zeros back in place of the fixed pattern.

1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th

Data 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

AMI with
B8ZS
Encoding

Tx Data 1 1 0 0 0 V B 0 V B 0 1 0 1 1

Substituted sequences

Figure 110 – B8ZS Encoded Signal

ALARMS T1 Signal LOS (Loss Of Signal)


The T1 Signal Loss alarm is defined as the absence of “marks” in the
incoming data – poor or no received signal level. When the T1 Signal LOS
is active, Frame Sync and Pattern Sync alarms may also be active.

Frame Sync
The Frame Sync alarm is declared when more than 2 out of 5 FT bits are
found in error for D4 (SF) Framing, or 2 out of 5 FPS bits in ESF framing
format are found to be in error. For D4 framing, the Frame Loss alarm is
cleared after detection of two consecutive complete framing sequences.
Likewise for ESF framing, the Frame Loss alarm is cleared after detection
of two consecutive FPS bit sequences. Frame loss can be caused by a
number of problems including bad connections, poor signal level,
noise/interference on the line, or line frequency offsets (T1 line frequency
that deviates from the nominal 1,544,000Hz bit frequency).

Pattern Sync
The Loss of Pattern Sync alarm is specific to BER test equipment, and it
may only be observed on test equipment when performing out-of-service
testing. Pattern sync losses occur under conditions of significant bit errors,
and may be caused by poor received signal level due to faulty network
elements, or by one side bad of the connection pair, or line frequency
offsets that may be caused by poor clock recovery.

Chapter 14
T1 ANALYZER 14-7

CH
B8ZS
Bipolar with 8-zero Substitution. A coding scheme in which the transmitter 14
“substitutes” a fixed pattern of ones, zeros, and BPVs in place of 8
consecutive zeros. This is a very specific pattern, each block of eight
consecutive zeros is replaced with 000VB0VB, where B represents and
inserted “1” bit, and V represents an inserted “1” that is a bipolar violation.

Red Alarm
Red alarm indicates the alarming equipment is unable to recover the
framing reliably. Corruption or loss of the signal will produce “red alarm.”
Connectivity has been lost toward the alarming equipment.

RAI
Remote Alarm Indication. A signal transmitted from terminal equipment in
the outgoing direction when it determines that it has lost the incoming
signal, or when it receives an AIS signal in the incoming direction. RAI is
also called the Yellow Alarm.

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)


The AIS is also known as a "Keep Alive" or "Blue Alarm" signal. Blue alarm
indicates a disruption in the communication path between the terminal
equipment. Communication devices, such as repeaters and multiplexers
must see and produce line activity at the DS1 rate. If no signal is received
that fills those requirements, the communications device produces a
series of pulses on its output side to maintain the required activity. Those
pulses represent data “1” in all data and all framing time slots. This signal
maintains communication integrity while providing no framing to the
terminal equipment. The receiving equipment displays a “red alarm” and
sends the signal for “yellow alarm” to the far end because it has no
framing, but at maintenance interfaces the equipment will report “AIS” or
Alarm Indication Signal. AIS is also called “all ones” because of the data
and framing pattern.

Chapter 14
14-8 T1 ANALYZER

Yellow Alarm
CH
Yellow alarm indicates reception from the far end of a data or framing
14
pattern that reports the far end is in “red alarm”. Red alarm and yellow
alarm states cannot exist simultaneously on a single piece of equipment
because the “yellow alarm” pattern must be received within a framed
signal.

For ESF framed signals, all bits of the Data Link channel within the
framing are set to data “0”; the customer data is undisturbed. For SF D4
framed signals, the pattern sent to indicate to the far end that inbound
framing has been lost is a coercion of the framed data so that bit 2 of each
timeslot is set to data “0” for three consecutive frames.

BPV (Bipolar Violation)


In a bipolar signal, a one (mark or pulse) that has the same polarity as the
previous one (mark or pulse).

PHYSICAL A T1 is physically made up of two balanced pairs of copper wire


INTERFACE (commonly known as twisted pair). The pairs are used in a full duplex
configuration where one pair transmits information and the other pair
receives information. Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) typically
terminates a T1 with a RJ-48C jack. The following illustration shows a
typical T1 cable and interface.

Figure 111 – Typical T1 Cabling

Chapter 14
T1 ANALYZER 14-9

CH
USING T1 ANALYZER
14
The JDSU JD7105A provides a simple solution for all your T1 testing
needs, from basic transmission testing to BERT (Bit Error Rate Test)
testing.

The following sections provide basics performing a T1 Analyzer


Measurement.

Chapter 14
14-10 T1 ANALYZER

CH
HOW TO USE KEYS
14

In this section describes hard key usages in T1 Analyzer measurement.


Keys are not listed in here will not be used.
MEASURE
MEASURE MEASURE OFF: Activates T1 Analyzer Measurement mode or return to
main menu of E1/T1 Analyzer.

BERT: Sets the measurement parameters of BER testing.

LOOP TEST: Sets the measurement parameters of LOOP TEST.

Remote Loop Up: Activates external loop back, the instrument


sends request the loop back mode to the system.
Remote Loop Dn: Deactivates external loop back, the
instrument sends request the clear of loop back mode to the
system.
Self Loop Up: Activates internal loop back.
Self Loop Dn: Deactivates internal loop back, reverting the
instrument to a through mode.

EVENT LOG: Enables or disables event logging functionality of T1


Analyzer.

RX SIGNAL (VPP) OFF/ON: Enables or Disables Vpp.


MEASURE SETUP
MEASURE SETUP RX INPUT: Selects the receive inputs.
Terminate: The transmitter sends data according to the
transmitter settings in the Measure Setup menu, including
framing, line-code, and BER patterns. Terminate mode provides a
nominal 100ohm input impedance.
Bridge: Bridge mode provides greater than 1kohms input
impedance for in-service monitoring, bridging the receiver input
across lines that are terminated elsewhere in the network.
Monitor: The monitor mode is designed for in-service monitoring
of T1 lines. In monitor mode, the instrument is set for 100ohms
nominal input impedance.

Chapter 14
T1 ANALYZER 14-11

CH
FRAMING: Selects the types of framing. If the Framing type of received
signal is not accord with receiver setting, then Framing alarm occurs. 14
SF-D4 (Super Frame-D4): Group of 12 Frames, used to align
equipment for framing.
ESF (Extended Super Frame): Group of 24 Frames, used to
align equipment for framing, Uses 4K for a maintenance channel
(Facilities Data Link), 2K for CRC-6 checksum and 2K for
framing/synchronization.

LINE CODE: Selects the types of line codes to send T1 signal.


AMI: Alternate Mark Inversion, A line code uses a three level
signals to convey binary digits in which successive binary ones
(“marks” or pulses) are of alternating polarity, either positive or
negative, equal in amplitude. A binary zero (“space”) is
transmitted as no pulse, or zero amplitude.
B8ZS: Bipolar with 8-zero Substitution. A coding scheme in which
the transmitter "substitutes" a fixed pattern of ones, zeros, and
BPVs in place of 8 consecutive zeros.

PATTERN: Selects the types of patterns.


Off: No patterns are sent.
1-8: An eight-bit pattern that contains a single one. Used to test
clock recovery.
1-16: A sixteen-bit pattern that contains a single one. Used to test
clock recovery.
All 1's: A pattern that causes line drivers to consume the
maximum power.
All 0's: A pattern that is often selected to verify B8ZS
provisioning. Circuit will drop if optioned for AMI.
Alternate: A pattern that alternates between ones and zeroes.
3-24: A twenty-four bit-pattern containing 3 ones with the longest
length of consecutive zeroes constrained to fifteen. It has ones
density of 12.5% and is used to check clock recovery.
QRSS: A pseudorandom pattern that simulates live traffic on a
circuit. It is a very common test pattern
2e23: A pseudorandom pattern based on a 23 bit shift register.
2e15: A pseudorandom pattern based on a 15 bit shift register.
2e23 INV: Bit inversed pseudorandom pattern based on a 23 bit
shift register.

Chapter 14
14-12 T1 ANALYZER

CH
2e15 INV: Bit inversed pseudorandom pattern based on a 15 bit
14
shift register.

TX CLOCK: Selects the clock source to measure frequency and timing.


Int: Internal clock uses an internal oscillator, in case of external
reference is not available, the instrument does not transmit signal
to synchronized equipment, the instrument provides the clock to
the unit under test and most cases in Loopback test mode.
Rx: Transmit clock uses the frequency recovered from the
received signal (Network Loop), if accurate frequency
measurement is needed.

TX LBO (Transmit Line Build Out): Selects the line build out level.
Possible values for LBO are 0 dB, -7.5 dB, or -15 dB.

(0dB) is used for these cases.


- Test set is connected to the DSX front panel, to CSU, to NIU
or Channel Bank.
- Cabling less than about 130ft in-between test set and DSX.
- In most cases.

(-7.5, -15dB) are used for the below cases,


- Attenuation is needed where the T1 line is series connected
to 7.5dB, 15dB attenuator.

LOOP CODES
LINK: Select between In-Band and Data-Link. Use Data-Link
when framing is ESF.
Inband
Datalink
CSU: Select CSU (Channel Service Unit) codes.
NIU: Select NIU (Network Interface Unit) codes.

Chapter 14
T1 ANALYZER 14-13

CH
DISPLAY
OVERVIEW 14

Figure 112 – T1 Analyzer Screen

① Rx Mode: Current test modes setting information, Terminate, Bridge


and Monitor
② Framing: Framing modes setting information, SF-D4 and ESF
③ Line Code: Two different line coding formats are used in T1
networks, AMI and B8ZS
④ Tx Clock: Tx Clock setting information, Internal and Rx
⑤ Tx Pattern: Selected Tx Patter information
⑥ Off, 1-8, 1-16, All 1’s, All 0’s, Alternate, 3-24, QRSS, 2e23, 2e15,
2e23 INV, 2e15 INV
⑦ Tx LBO: Line Build Out level setting information, 0dB, -7.5dB, and
-15dB
⑧ Loop Mode: Current loop modes information, CSU and NIU
⑨ Loop Link: Inband and Datalink
⑩ Measure On/Off: Measure on/off selection menu
⑪ BERT: Bit Error Rate Testing setting menu, user can set the
following setups
⑫ Tx Signal, Error Set, Error Injection, Alarm on/off (AIS, RAI Alarm),
and Clear History
⑬ Loop Test: Remote Loop Up/Down, Self Loop Up/Down
⑭ Event Log On/Off: Activate and Deactivate Event logging capability

Chapter 14
14-14 T1 ANALYZER

CH
Measurement Setup The following is the basic settings and procedure for T1 analysis.
14
Menu Description

Mode

[Mode]

{E1/T1} {T1} Select T1 Analyzer Mode

BERT setup Set up BERT testing parameters

{BERT} Select BERT

{TX Signal}/{On/Off} Tx signal on/off

{Error Set}/{1E-3/1E-4/1E-5/1} Sets the Error injection

{AIS Alarm]/{On/Off} Set AIS alarm

{RAI Alarm]/{On/Off} Set RAI alarm

{Clear History} Clear previous alarm history

Loop Test setup Select Loop Test

{Loop Test}

{Remote Loop Up}/{Remote Loop Dn}/

{Self Loop Up}/{Self Loop Dn}

Measure Setup Measurement Setting

[Measure Setup] Select Measure Setup

{RX Input} Select Rx Input mode

{Terminate/Bridge/Monitor}

{Framing} Select Framing type

{SF-D4/ESF}

{Line Code} Select Line Code

{AMI/B8ZS}

{Pattern} Select Stress Pattern

{Off/1-8/1-16/All 1’s/All 0’s/Alternate/

3-24/QRSS/2e23/2e15/2e23 INV/

2e15 INV}

{TX Clock} Select the timing source

{Int/Rx}

{TX LBO} Select the Tx Line Build Out Level

{0dB/-7.5dB/-15dB}

{Loop Codes} Select Loop Codes

{Link/CSU/NIU}

Table 88 – T1 Analysis Procedure

Chapter 14
T1 ANALYZER 14-15

CH
Connection Diagram
14
Out-of-service Testing
Point-to-point

Loop back
GenComm GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

ES
C

Tx
NE NE
+/ De

Rx
.
- l

7 8 9

Fr Tr
eq ac Me Sy 4 5 6
/ e/ Ma Sa ste
as
Ch Di rk ve m
ur
Me
an spl er
Pe e 1 2 3
Am B
ay as
ak Mo
plitu W/ ur Lo
Se de
de AV e ad En
G arc Se 0 ter
h tu
p

Error Injection & Measurement


GenComm GC7105A Base Station Analyzer

ES
Error
Injection
C

Tx Rx
NE
+/ De

Rx
.

Tx
- l

7 8 9

Fr Tr
eq ac Me Sy 4 5 6
/ e/ Ma Sa ste
as
Ch Di rk ve m
ur
Me
an spl er
Pe e 1 2 3
Am B
ay as
ak Mo
plitu W/ ur Lo
Se de
de AV e ad En
G arc Se 0 ter
h tu

Error
p

Measurement

In-service Monitoring

Figure 113 – Typical Connection Diagram for T1 Analysis

Chapter 14
14-16 T1 ANALYZER

CH
Terminate Mode It is out-of-service testing (removing live traffic from the T1 circuit before
14
testing begins), and is used for analyzing received T1 signal. The
transmitter sends data according to the Tx Clock setting, including framing,
line-code, and BER patterns. Terminate mode provides a nominal 100
ohm input impedance.

Bridge Mode It is in-service monitoring test and bridging the receiver input across lines
that are terminated in the network without interrupting the signal.

Monitor Mode In-service test, transmitter will activate to send test patterns.

Loop Test Loopback mode is intended for out-of-service testing of T1 lines. In this
mode, the instrument performs a “line loopback” of the data from the
receiver to the transmitter.

Chapter 14
APPENDIX 15-1

15.0 APPENDIX

APPENDIX
In this chapter
APPENDIX A. SPECIFICATION .......................................................................................................................... 15-2
APPENDIX B. BATTERY SPECIFICATION ............................................................................................................ 15-4
APPENDIX C. CABLE LIST .............................................................................................................................. 15-5
APPENDIX D. BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD ................................................................................... 15-7
APPENDIX E. VSWR-RETURN LOSS CONVERSION TABLE ................................................................................. 15-8
ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................... 15-9

Appendix
15-2 SPECIFICATION

APPENDIX A. SPECIFICATION
Standard Gain/Loss Measurement
Frequency Accuracy ±0.05ppm Internal Frequency Range 25MHz ~ 3GHz
Frequency Aging ±0.5ppm/year Frequency Resolution 100KHz
APPENDIX

Display 8.4' TFT LCD (800 x 600 mode) Output Power Level -30dBm or 0dBm (nominal)
Frequency and time reference
Dynamic Range -80 ~ 60dB
Even Second TTL
10MHz,13MHz,15MHz -10 ~ + 10dBm Channel Scanner
Spectrum Analyzer Frequency Range 100KHz ~ 3GHz
Input Frequency Range 100KHz ~ 3GHz Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy
Maximum Input Level +30dBm (1W) Measurement Range -110 ~ 20dBm
Amplitude Accuracy ±1.0dB Channel Power Accuracy ±1.0dB
Resolution Bandwidth 10Hz ~ 3MHz (1-3 sequence) CDMA TX Analyzer
Video Bandwidth 1Hz ~ 3MHz (1-3 sequence) 410MHz ~ 495MHz, 805MHz ~ 940MHz
Frequency Range
Dynamic Range > 85dB 1750MHz ~ 2170MHz
Input Attenuation 0~55dB (step 5dB) Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy
-95dBc @30KHz offset Waveform Quality (ρ) ±0.005 for 0.9 < ρ < 1
SSB Phase Noise
-105dBc @100KHz offset Pilot Time Alignment (Tau) ± 0.5μs
Typical -140dBm ±0.5 dB relative power
Code Domain Power
@100Hz RBW with Preamp On ±1.5 dB absolute power
Frequency Typical Max Pilot Power ±1.0dB
DANL
10MHz ~ 1GHz -140dBm -142dBm Channel Power ±1.0dB
1GHz ~ 2GHz -138dBm -140dBm EVDO TX Analyzer
2GHz ~ 3GHz -138dBm -138dBm 410MHz ~ 495MHz, 805MHz ~ 940MHz
Frequency Range
Measurement Range DANL ~ +30dBm 1750MHz ~ 2170MHz
RF In VSWR < 1.5 Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy
Power Meter Waveform Quality (ρ) ±0.005 for 0.9 < ρ < 1
Frequency Range 100KHz ~ 3GHz Pilot Time Alignment (Tau) ± 0.5μs
Display ±100dBm (user settable) ±0.5 dB relative power
Code Domain Power
Measurement Range -70dBm ~ +30dBm ±1.5 dB absolute power
Offset Range 0 ~ 60dBm Pilot Power ±1.0dB
-40dBm ≤ Power ≤ +30dBm ±1.0dB Channel Power ±1.0dB
Accuracy
-70dBm ≤ Power < -40dBm ±1.5dB WCDMA/HSDPA TX Analyzer
VSWR < 1.5 Frequency Range 869MHz ~ 894MHz, 1710MHz ~ 2170MHz
Maximum Power +30dBm(1W) without external attenuator Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy
Cable and Antenna Analyzer EVM Accuracy ±2.0 % for 2% < EVM < 20%
Max input power (RF Out) +25dBm, ±50VDC Residual EVM 3.0% typical
Frequency Range 25MHz ~ 4GHz ±0.5% for code channel power >-27dB
Frequency Resolution 100KHz Code Domain Power 16,32,64 DCPH (Test Mode 1)
Data Points 126, 251, 501, 1001 16,32 DCPH (Test Mode 2, 3)
Measurement Speed 1,1.3, 2.5, 5sec for each data point CPICH Accuracy ±1.0dBm
One port Power 0dBm (nominal) Channel Power ±0.7dB (Typical)
Corrected Directivity 40dB (typical) Occupied Bandwidth ±100KHz
≤ ±(0.8 +|20 log (1+10-EP/20)|) dB (typical) Residual ACLR < -58dB @5MHz, < -60dB @10MHz
1 Port Accuracy
EP=Directivity-Measured Return Loss ACLR Accuracy ±0.7dB
On Frequency : +5dBm GSM/GPRS/EDGE TX Analyzer
Immunity to Interference
On Channel : +17dBm On Channel : 450MHz ~ 500MHz, 820 ~ 965MHz
VSWR +17dBm 1705MHz ~ 1995MHz
Range 1 ~ 65 Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy
Resolution 0.01 GSMK Modulation Quality
±0.5deg
Return Loss RMS Phase
Range 0 ~ 60dB Residual Error (GSMK) 0.5deg
Resolution 0.01 8PSK Modulation
±1.5%
DTF Quality EVM
VSWR:1 ~ 65 Residual Error (8PSK) 2.50%
Vertical Range
Return Loss: 0 ~ 60dB Burst Power ±1.0dB
Vertical Resolution 0.01 GSM Channel Scanner
Distance 0 ~ 1250m (4125ft)
450MHz ~ 500MHz, 820 ~ 965MHz
0 to (# of data points-1) x Horizontal Frequency Range
Horizontal Range 1705MHz ~ 1995MHz
Resolution
(1.5x108)(Vp) /(Delta) x 0.95 Frequency Accuracy ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy
Horizontal Resolution Vp: cable’s relative propagation velocity Measurement Range -110 ~ 20dBm
Delta[Hz] = Stop Freq – Start Freq Power Accuracy ±1.0dB
Cable Loss TD-SCDMA TX Analyzer
Range 0 ~ 30dB Frequency Range 1880 ~ 1920MHz, 2010 ~ 2025MHz
Resolution 0.01dB Frequency Error ±10Hz + Ref Freq/Time accuracy

Specification
SPECIFICATION 15-3

TD-SCDMA(Continued) Power Range Average: 0.15 ~ 150W (21.76 ~ 51.76dBm)


2.0% typical for P-CCPCH slot & 1channel, Peak : 4 ~ 400W (36.02 ~ 56.02dBm)
Residual EVM (rms) 1,2
slot power > -50dBm Measurement Uncertainty ±4% of reading + 0.05W

APPENDIX
Time Error (Tau) ±0.2us ≤2500MHz, 27dB Min
Input Return Loss
Supported Modulation QPSK/8PSK > 2500MHz, 25dB
Spread Factor Auto 1,2,4,8,16 Directivity 27dB Min
±1dB typical for +10dBm to -40dBm < 1GHz, < 0.05dB
Channel Power (RRC)
±1.5dB Max Insertion Loss 1 ~ 2GHz, < 0.1dB,
T1 Analyzer 2 ~ 3.8GHz < 0.13dB
Error Detect Code BPV, Frame, CRC Connector Type N-Female on both ends
Alarm Detection Red Alarm, Yellow Alarm, AIS Alarm JD733A
Receive Level +6 ~ -36dB DSX Sensor Type Average and Peak
Electrical Interface Frequency Range 150 ~ 3500MHz
Connectors Rx/TX RJ48C (100Ω) Average: 0.25 ~ 20W (24 ~ 43dBm)
Power Range
Output 0dB, -7.5dB and -15dB Peak: 0.25 ~ 20W (24 ~ 43dBm)
1,2
Line Code AMI, B8ZS Measurement Uncertainty ±4% of reading + 0.05W
Impedance 100Ω or 1000Ω (Bridge) ≤2500MHz, 27dB Min
Input Return Loss
Input > 2500MHz, 25dB
Term/Bridge/Monitor 0 ~ -20dB Directivity 27dB Min
Transmitter and Receiver < 1GHz, < 0.05dB
Framing D4,ESF Insertion Loss 1 ~ 2GHz, < 0.1dB
Channel Formats Full T1 2 ~ 3.5GHz < 0.13dB
1-8, 1-16, ALL1, ALL0, 0101 Connector Type N-Female on both ends
Test Pattern 3E-24, QRSS, 2E-23, 2E-15 Terminating Power Sensors (Optional)
2E-23 inverse, 2E-15 inverse JD732A, JD734A,JD736A
Additional Functions Average (JD732A)
Reference Clock Received or Internal Sensor Type Peak (JD734A)
Event Log Capability Internal Memory or External USB Average and Peak (JD736A)
Error Insertion 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7 Frequency Range 20 ~ 3800MHz
Error Rate Count CRC, Frame Code Calculated BER Power Range -30 ~ +20dBm (1uW ~ 100mW)
E1 Analyzer Measurement Uncertainty ±7% of reading1,2
Error Detect Code BPV, FAS, CRC-4 Connector Type N-Male
Alarm Detection FAS RAI, MFAS RAI, AIS External Reference Clock
Receive Level +6 ~ -36dB DSX 10,13,15MHz External Reference
Electrical Interface Input Power -10 ~ +10dBm
Connectors Rx/TX RJ48C (120Ω) Connector Type SMA
Output 0dB, -6dB (ITU-T Rec.G.703) Even Second
Line Code AMI, HDB3 Input Level TTL Compatible
Impedance Term, Monitor 120Ω, Bridge > 1000Ω Connector Type SMA
Input Environmental Condition
Term/Bridge/Monitor 0 ~ -20dB Operating Temperature -5℃ ~ 50℃ (23℉ ~ 122℉ )
Transmitter and Receiver Storage Temperature -20℃ ~ 70℃ (-4℉ ~ 158℉)
Unframed, PCM-30, PCM-30 with CRC Calibration Cycle 1 year
Framing
PCM-31, PCM-31 with CRC Dimension
Channel Formats Full T1 Weight 5.6kg (12.1lbs) (Include Battery)
Test Pattern 1-8, 1-16, ALL1, ALL0, 0101, 20ITU Size (W x H x D) 315x245x95mm (12.4'x9.6'x3.7')
Additional Functions General
Reference Clock Received or Internal Interface Ports
Event Log Capability Internal Memory or External USB Serial 1 Port
Error Insertion 1E-5, 1E-6, 1E-7 USB 1.1 1 Port
Error Rate Count CRC, Frame Code Calculated BER 10Mbps LAN 1 Port
High Accuracy Power Meter GPS Antenna (SMA) 1 Port
(Requires Optional Directional/Terminating Power Sensor) Built-in Speaker
Display Range -80 ~ +120dBm Battery (Lithium Ion)
Offset Range 0 ~ 60dB Normal Voltage 10.8V
Resolution 0.01dB or 0.1xW Normal Capacity 6840mA
Directional power Sensors (Optional) Maximum Charge Voltage 12.6V
JD731A Battery Operation Hour 1.5 Hours at full charge
Sensor Type Average and Peak Power Supply
Frequency Range 300 ~ 3800MHz AC Input 100 ~ 240V 2.5A, 50 ~ 60Hz
Specification and product description subject to change without notice.

1 Specification is provided at a temperature 25℃±10℃


2
CW Condition

Specification
15-4 BATTERY SPECIFICATION

APPENDIX B. BATTERY SPECIFICATION

HANDLING
 Avoid shorting the battery
 Do not immerse in water.
 Do not disassemble or deform the battery
 Do not expose to, or dispose of the battery in fire.
 Avoid excessive physical shock or vibration.
APPENDIX

 Keep out of the reach of children.


 Never use a battery that appears to have suffered abuse.

STORAGE
 Store in a cool, dry and well-ventilated area.

NOMINAL VOLTAGE
 The battery nominal operating voltage is 10.8V.

ENVIRONMENTAL/SAFETY SPECIFICATIONS
The battery complies with the following:
 EMC Directive Measures 89/336/EEC
 Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
 Toxic Chemicals Directive 91/157/EEC
 “RoHS“ -directive 02/95/EC

The battery has the following approvals and the pack is labeled accordingly:
 FCC
 CE

LIFE EXPECTANCY
Given normal storage & usage, user can expect the battery to deliver 80% or more of it's initial
capacity after 300 charge/discharge cycles at 25°C.

SHELF LIFE
The batteries are shipped with between 80% and 90% rated capacity and this provides a minimum
of 6 months shelf life, when stored at 25°C.

Battery
Specification
CABLE LIST 15-5

APPENDIX C. CABLE LIST

Cable Type Relative Propagation Velocity (V¦) Nominal Attenuation dB/m @ 1000MHz

FSJ1-50A 0.84 0.197


FSJ250 0.83 0.134
FSJ4-50B 0.81 0.119
HCC 12-50J 0.915 0.092
HCC 158-50J 0.95 0.023
HCC 300-50J 0.96 0.014
HCC 312-50J 0.96 0.013
HCC 78-50J 0.915 0.042

APPENDIX
HF 4-1/8” Cu2Y 0.97 0.01
HF 5” Cu2Y 0.96 0.007
HF 6-1/8”Cu2Y 0.97 0.006
HJ4.5-50 0.92 0.054
HJ4-50 0.914 0.087
HJ5-50 0.916 0.042
HJ7-50A 0.921 0.023
LDF12-50 0.88 0.022
LDF4-50A 0.88 0.077
LDF5-50A 0.89 0.043
LDF6-50 0.89 0.032
LDFF7-50A 0.88 0.027
LMR100 0.8 0.792
LMR1200 0.88 0.044
LMR1700 0.89 0.033
LMR200 O.830 0.344
LMR240 0.84 0.262
LMR400 0.85 0.135
LMR500 0.86 0.109
LMR600 0.87 0.087
LMR900 0.87 0.056
RG142 0.69 0.443
RG17, 17A 0.659 0.18
RG174 0.66 0.984
RG178B 0.69 1.509
RG187, 188 0.69 1.017
RG213/U 0.66 0.292
RG214 0.659 0.292
RG223 0.659 0.165
RG55, 55A, 55B 0.659 0.541
RG58, 58B 0.659 1.574
RG58A, 58C 0.659 0.787
RG8, 8A, 10, 10A 0.659 0.262
RG9, 9A 0.659 0.289
HFSC-12D(1/2") 0.81 0.112
HFC-12D(1/2") 0.88 0.072
HFC-22D(7/8") 0.88 0.041
HFC-33D(1_1/4") 0.88 0.0294
HFC-42D(1_5/8") 0.87 0.0243
RFCX-12D(1/2") 0.88 0.088
RFCX-22D(7/8") 0.88 0.049

Cable List
15-6 CABLE LIST

Cable Type Relative Propagation Velocity (V¦) Nominal Attenuation dB/m @ 1000MHz
RFCX-
0.88 0.038
33D(1_1/4")
RFCX-
0.87 0.028
42D(1_5/8")
RFCL-22D(7/8") 0.88 0.044
RFCL-
0.88 0.034
33D(1_1/4")
RFCL-
0.87 0.0315
42D(1_5/8")
APPENDIX

Cable List
BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD 15-7

APPENDIX D. BAND, FREQUENCY, CHANNEL STANDARD

Uplink Downlink
Standard
Start Freq Stop Freq Valid Channels Start Freq Stop Freq Valid Channels
GSM450 450.4MHz 457.6MHz 259≤n≤293 460.4MHz 467.6MHz 259≤n≤293
GSM480 478.8MHz 486.0MHZ 306≤n≤340 488.8MHz 496.0MHz 306≤n≤340
GSM850 824MHz 849MHz 128≤n≤251 869MHz 894MHz 128≤n≤251
GSM900 890MHz 915MHz 1≤n≤124 935.0MHz 960MHz 1≤n≤124
0≤n≤124 0≤n≤124
GSM EGSM900 880MHz 915MHz 925MHz 960MHz
975≤n≤1023 975≤n≤1023
0≤n≤124 0≤n≤124
RGSM900 876MHz 915MHz 921MHz 960MHz
955≤n≤1023 955≤n≤1023
DCS1800 1710MHz 1785MHz 512≤n≤885 1805.0MHz 1880MHz 512≤n≤885
PCS1900 1850MHz 1910MHz 512≤n≤810 1930MHz 1990MHz 512≤n≤810
1≤n≤799 1≤n≤799
Band 0 (Cellular) 824MHz 849MHz 869MHz 894MHz
991≤n≤1023 991≤n≤1023
Band 1 (N.A. PCS) 1850MHz 1910MHz 0≤n≤1199 1930MHz 1990MHz 0≤n≤1199
Band 4 (Korean PCS) 1750MHz 1780MHz 0≤n≤599 1840MHz 1870MHz 0≤n≤599

APPENDIX
1≤n≤300 1≤n≤300
CDMA 539≤n≤871 539≤n≤871
Band 5 (NMT-450) 411.675MHz 483.480MHz 421.675MHZ 493.480MHz
1039≤n≤1473 1039≤n≤1473
1792≤n≤2016 1792≤n≤2016
Band 6 (IMT2000) 1920MHz 1980MHz 0≤n≤1199 2100MHz 2170MHZ 0≤n≤1199
0≤n≤719 0≤n≤719
Band 10 (2nd 800MHz) 806MHz 901MHz 851MHz 940MHz
720≤n≤919 720≤n≤919
Band I (2100-General) 1920 1980 9612≤n≤9888 2110 2170 10562≤n≤10838
Band II (1900-General) 9262≤n≤9538 9662≤n≤9938
1850 1910 1930 1990
Band II (1900-Additional) 12≤n≤287 412≤n≤687
WCDMA Band IV (1700-General) 1312≤n≤1513 1537≤n≤1738
1710 1775 2100 2155
Band IV (1700-Additional) 1662≤n≤1862 1887≤n≤2087
Band V (850-General) 4132≤n≤4233 4357≤n≤4458
824 849 869 894
Band V (850-Additional) 782≤n≤862 1007≤n≤1087

Band, Freq,
Channel Std
15-8 VSWR-RETURN LOSS CONVERSION

APPENDIX E. VSWR-RETURN LOSS CONVERSION TABLE

· Return Loss=20log10(VSWR+1/VSWR-1) (dB)


R.L./20 R.L./20
· VSWR=(10 +1/10 -1)

Return Trans. Volt. Power Power Return Trans. Volt. Power Power
VSWR Loss Loss Refl Trans Refl VSWR Loss Loss Refl Trans Refl
(dB) (dB) Coeff (%) (%) (dB) (dB) Coeff (%) (%)
1.00 -- 0.000 0.00 100.0 0.0 1.64 12.3 0.263 0.24 94.1 5.9
1.01 46.1 0.000 0.00 100.0 0.0 1.66 12.1 0.276 0.25 93.8 6.2
1.02 40.1 0.000 0.01 100.0 0.0 1.68 11.9 0.289 0.25 93.6 6.4
1.03 36.6 0.001 0.01 100.0 0.0 1.70 11.7 0.302 0.26 93.3 6.7
1.04 34.2 0.002 0.02 100.0 0.0 1.72 11.5 0.315 0.26 93.0 7.0
1.05 32.3 0.003 0.02 99.9 0.1 1.74 11.4 0.329 0.27 92.7 7.3
1.06 30.7 0.004 0.03 99.9 0.1 1.76 11.2 0.342 0.28 92.4 7.6
1.07 29.4 0.005 0.03 99.9 0.1 1.78 11.0 0.356 0.28 92.1 7.9
1.08 28.3 0.006 0.04 99.9 0.1 1.80 10.9 0.370 0.29 91.8 8.2
1.09 27.3 0.008 0.04 99.8 0.2 1.82 10.7 0.384 0.29 91.5 8.5
1.10 26.4 0.010 0.05 99.8 0.2 1.84 10.6 0.398 0.30 91.3 8.7
1.11 25.7 0.012 0.05 99.7 0.3 1.86 10.4 0.412 0.30 91.0 9.0
1.12 24.9 0.014 0.06 99.7 0.3 1.88 10.3 0.426 0.31 90.7 9.3
1.13 24.3 0.016 0.06 99.6 0.4 1.90 10.2 0.440 0.31 90.4 9.6
1.14 23.7 0.019 0.07 99.6 0.4 1.92 10.0 0.454 0.32 90.1 9.9
1.15 23.1 0.021 0.07 99.5 0.5 1.94 9.9 0.468 0.32 89.8 10.2
APPENDIX

1.16 22.6 0.024 0.07 99.5 0.5 1.96 9.8 0.483 0.32 89.5 10.5
1.17 22.1 0.027 0.08 99.4 0.6 1.98 9.7 0.497 0.33 89.2 10.8
1.18 21.7 0.030 0.08 99.3 0.7 2.00 9.5 0.512 0.33 88.9 11.1
1.19 21.2 0.033 0.09 99.2 0.8 2.50 7.4 0.881 0.43 81.6 18.4
1.20 20.8 0.036 0.09 99.2 0.8 3.00 6.0 1.249 0.50 75.0 25.0
1.21 20.4 0.039 0.10 99.1 0.9 3.50 5.1 1.603 0.56 69.1 30.9
1.22 20.1 0.043 0.10 99.0 1.0 4.00 4.4 1.938 0.60 64.0 36.0
1.23 19.7 0.046 0.10 98.9 1.1 4.50 3.9 2.255 0.64 59.5 40.5
1.24 19.4 0.050 0.11 98.9 1.1 5.00 3.5 2.553 0.67 55.6 44.4
1.25 19.1 0.054 0.11 98.8 1.2 5.50 3.2 2.834 0.69 52.1 47.9
1.26 18.8 0.058 0.12 98.7 1.3 6.00 2.9 3.100 0.71 49.0 51.0
1.27 18.5 0.062 0.12 98.6 1.4 6.50 2.7 3.351 0.73 46.2 53.8
1.28 18.2 0.066 0.12 98.5 1.5 7.00 2.5 3.590 0.75 43.7 56.3
1.29 17.9 0.070 0.13 98.4 1.6 7.50 2.3 3.817 0.76 41.5 58.5
1.30 17.7 0.075 0.13 98.3 1.7 8.00 2.2 4.033 0.78 39.5 60.5
1.32 17.2 0.083 0.14 98.1 1.9 8.50 2.1 4.240 0.79 37.7 62.3
1.34 16.8 0.093 0.15 97.9 2.1 9.00 1.9 4.437 0.80 36.0 64.0
1.36 16.3 0.102 0.15 97.7 2.3 9.50 1.8 4.626 0.81 34.5 65.5
1.38 15.9 0.112 0.16 97.5 2.5 10.00 1.7 4.807 0.82 33.1 66.9
1.40 15.8 0.122 0.17 97.2 2.8 11.00 1.6 5.149 0.83 30.6 69.4
1.42 15.2 0.133 0.17 97.0 3.0 12.00 1.5 5.466 0.85 28.4 71.6
1.44 14.9 0.144 0.18 96.7 3.3 13.00 1.3 5.762 0.86 26.5 73.5
1.46 14.6 0.155 0.19 96.5 3.5 14.00 1.2 6.040 0.87 24.9 75.1
1.48 14.3 0.166 0.19 96.3 3.7 15.00 1.2 6.301 0.88 23.4 76.6
1.50 14.0 0.177 0.20 96.0 4.0 16.00 1.1 6.547 0.88 22.1 77.9
1.52 13.7 0.189 0.21 95.7 4.3 17.00 1.0 6.780 0.89 21.0 79.0
1.54 13.4 0.201 0.21 95.5 4.5 18.00 1.0 7.002 0.89 19.9 80.1
1.56 13.2 0.213 0.22 95.2 4.8 19.00 0.9 7.212 0.90 19.0 81.0
1.58 13.0 0.225 0.22 94.9 5.1 20.00 0.9 7.413 0.90 18.1 81.9
1.60 12.7 0.238 0.23 94.7 5.3 25.00 0.7 8.299 0.92 14.8 85.2
1.62 12.5 0.250 0.24 94.4 5.6 30.00 0.6 9.035 0.94 12.5 87.5

VSWR-RL
Conversion
ORDERING INFORMATION 15-9

ORDERING INFORMATION

Standard
Spectrum Analyzer 100kHz ~ 3GHz
Power Meter 100kHz ~ 3GHz

Options
Note: Upgrade options for the JD7105A use the designation JD7105AU before the respective option number

JD7105A001 Frequency Extension up to 3.7GHz


JD7105A002 E1 Analyzer (Requires adapters G710050361, 50362 or 50363)
JD7105A003 Gain/Loss Measurement (Requires option 007)
JD7105A004 GPS Receiver and Antenna
JD7105A005 T1 Analyzer (Requires adapters G710050361, 50362 or 50363)
JD7105A006 Channel Scanner
JD7105A007 Cable and Antenna Analyzer (Recommended calibration kit JD72450509)
JD7105A008 Interference Analyzer (Recommended antennas G700050351~5 and/or G700050361~3)
JD7105A009 GSM Channel Scanner
JD7105A010 CDMA2000 OTA (Requires options 004 and 020)
JD7105A011 WCDMA OTA (Requires options 004 and 030)
JD7105A012 GSM/GPRS/EDGE OTA (Requires options 004, 040 and 041)
JD7105A013 TD-SCDMA OTA (Requires options 004 and 047)
JD7105A020 CDMA Analyzer
JD7105A021 EVDO Analyzer (Requires option 020)
JD7105A030 WCDMA Analyzer
JD7105A031 HSDPA Analyzer (Requires option 030)
JD7105A040 GSM/GPRS Analyzer (Recommended option 009)
JD7105A041 EDGE Analyzer (Requires option 040)
JD7105A047 TD-SCDM Analyzer
1
G700050351 400 ~ 450MHz Omni RF Antenna
1
G700050352 450 ~ 500MHz Omni RF Antenna
1
G700050353 806 ~ 894MHz Omni RF Antenna
1
G700050354 870 ~ 960MHz Omni RF Antenna
1
G700050355 1710 ~ 2170MHz Omni RF Antenna
1
G700050361 806 ~ 866MHz Yagi RF Antenna
1
G700050362 824 ~ 894MHz Yagi RF Antenna
1
G700050363 1750 ~ 2390MHz Yagi RF Antenna
2
G710050361 RJ45 to Y Bantam Cable
2
G710050362 RJ45 to Y BNC Cable
2
G710050363 RJ45 to 4 Alligator Clips
1
Required for OTA/Interference Measurement (Options 008, 010, 011, 012, 013)
2
Required for E1/T1 Analyzer (Option 002 or 005)

Standard Accessories
ƒ JD71050341 : Soft Carrying Case
ƒ G710550322 : AC-DC Adapter
ƒ G710550335 : Cross LAN Cable (1.5m)
ƒ GC72450517 : 1GByte USB Memory
ƒ G710550321 : Lithium-ion Battery
ƒ G710550316 : Stylus Pen
ƒ JD71050361 : User’s Manual and Application Software CD

Optional Accessories
ƒ JD72450509 : Calibration Kit, 40dB, 4GHz, 50Ω N-Type
ƒ JD72450510 : Calibration Kit, 40dB,4GHz, 50Ω DIN-Type
ƒ G700050571 : Adapter N(m) to DIN(f), 50Ω
ƒ G700050572 : Adapter DIN(m) to DIN(m), 50Ω
ƒ G700050573 : Adapter N(m) to SMA(f), 50Ω
ƒ G700050574 : Adapter N(m) to BNC(f), 50Ω
ƒ JD71050342 : Hard Case
ƒ JD71050362 : User’s Printed Manual

High Accuracy Power Meter Sensors


ƒ JD731A: Directional Power Sensor (300 ~ 3800MHz, Average Power 0.15~150W, Peak Power 4~400W)
ƒ JD732A: Terminating Average Power Sensor (20 ~ 3800MHz, -30 ~ +20dBm)
ƒ JD734A: Terminating Peak Power Sensor (20 ~ 3800MHz, -30 ~ +20dBm)
ƒ JD736A: Terminating Dual Mode (Average/Peak) Power Sensor (20 ~ 3800MHz, -30 ~ +20dBm)

Ordering
Information
JD7105A

Test & Measurement Regional Sales


NORTH AMERICA LATIN AMERICA ASIA PACIFIC EMEA
Tel: +1 866 228 3762 Tel: +55 11 5503 3800 Tel: +852 2892 0990 Tel: +49 7121 86 2222
Fax: +1 301 353 9216 Fax: +55 11 5505 1598 Fax: +852 2892 0770 Fax: +49 7121 86 1222

© 2009 JDS Uniphase Corporation


For the most recent specifications, visit www.jdsu.com.
Document Release 1.7

Potrebbero piacerti anche